twt42025-r4.0-sg1-sen-i2.0

1149
7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0 http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1/1149 Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent

Upload: sidy-elbechir-drame

Post on 11-Feb-2018

214 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.

Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of itscontents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent

Page 2: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 2/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.

TERMS OF USE AND LEGAL NOTICE

 Alcatel-Lucent provides this training course to you subject to these Terms of Use and Legal Notice. Your use of this trainingcourse and/or this site constitutes your acceptance of and agreement to these Terms of Use and Legal Notice. These

Terms of Use and Legal Notice, as well as the contents of this training course, may be updated or amended by Alcatel-Lucent from time to time without prior notice to you. Your use of the Alcatel-Lucent training materials after such update oramendment constitutes your acceptance of and agreement to said updated or amended Terms of Use and Legal Notice.

SAFETY WARNING

 Alcatel-Lucent training materials can be for products or refer to products that have both lethal and dangerous voltagespresent. Always observe all safety precautions and do not work on the equipment alone. The user is strongly advised notto wear conductive jewelry while working on the products. Equipment referred to or used during this course may beelectrostatic sensitive. Please observe correct anti-static precautions.

PERMISSION TO USE CONTENT

The information, communications, scripts, photos, text, video, graphics, music, sounds, images and other materialsprovided in this training course (collectively the "Content"), is intended for the lawful use of employees of Alcatel-Lucentand other authorized participants in this Alcatel-Lucent training course. You are hereby granted a non-exclusive, non-

transferable permission to access and use the Content solely for your personal training and non-commercial use. Thispermission may be terminated by Alcatel-Lucent at any time for any reason or no reason, with or without notice. You mustimmediately cease use of the Content upon such termination.

COPYRIGHTS AND TRADEMARKS

The unauthorized copying, displaying or other use of any Content from this training course is a violation of the law and Alcatel-Lucent’s corporate policies. The Content is protected in France, the U.S. and other countries by a variety of laws,including but not limited to, copyright laws and treaty provisions, trademark laws, patent laws and other proprietary rightslaws (collectively, "IP Rights"). In addition to Alcatel-Lucent’s IP Rights in the Content, in part and in whole, Alcatel-Lucent,and any of the third parties who have licensed and/or contributed to the Content, owns a copyright in the formatting andpresentation of the Content.

 Alcatel-Lucent does not grant you any permission to use the Content other than the permission expressly stated in theseTerms of Use and Legal Notice. All other use of Content from this training course, including, but not limited to, modification,publication, transmission, participation in the transfer or sale of, copying, reproduction, republishing, creation of derivativeworks from, distribution, performance, display, incorporation into another training course or presentation, or in any otherway exploiting any of the Content, in whole or in part, for uses other than those expressly permitted herein is strictlyprohibited and shall not be made without Alcatel-Lucent’s prior written consent. All characters appearing in this trainingcourse are fictitious. Any resemblance to real persons, living or dead, is purely coincidental.

There may be a number of proprietary logos, marks, trademarks, slogans and product designations found in theContent. Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logos are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarksare the property of their respective owners. Alcatel-Lucent does not grant you a license to use any of the foregoing logos,marks, trademarks, slogans and product designations in any fashion. Granting of the right to access and use the Content fortraining purposes does not confer upon you any license under any of Alcatel-Lucent’s or any third party's IP Rights. 

DISCLAIMER 

 ALCATEL-LUCENT DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES REGARDING THE TRAINING COURSES OR THE CONTENT, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ALCATEL-LUCENT WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE OR LIABLE FOR ANY INJURY, LOSS, CLAIM,DAMAGE, OR ANY SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND

(INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOSS PROFITS OR LOSS SAVINGS), WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, STRICTLIABILITY OR OTHERWISE, THAT ARISES OUT OF OR IS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH (A) ANY USE OR MISUSE OF THECONTENT OR THE TRAINING COURSES BY YOU, OR (B) ANY FAILURE OR DELAY BY ALCATEL-LUCENT, ITS OFFICERS,DIRECTORS, AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES IN CONNECTION WITH THE CONTENT OR THE TRAINING COURSES (INCLUDING,WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE ANY COMPONENT OF THE CONTENT OR TRAINING BY 

 YOU). SOME JURISDICTIONS LIMIT OR PROHIBIT SUCH EXCLUSION OF WARRANTIES OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITIES AND SO THE FOREGOING EXCLUSION OF WARRANTIES OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

GOVERNING LAW

These Terms of Use and Legal Notice are governed by the laws of France. The operation and use of the training course isgoverned by the laws of the country that governs your employment contract, if applicable. If any provision of these Termsof Use and Legal Notice, or the application thereto to a person or circumstance, is held invalid or unenforceable by law,statute or a court of competent jurisdiction, for any reason, then such provision shall be modified and/or superseded by aprovision that reflects the intent of the original provision as closely as possible. All other provisions of these Terms of Useand Legal Notice shall remain in full force and effect. You may not assign these Terms of Use or any permission granted

hereunder without Alcatel-Lucent’s prior written consent. Nothing herein shall be deemed an employment agreement or anoffer of employment or an alteration in any way of a user’s terms of employment with or within Alcatel -Lucent.

Copyright © 2011 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved

Page 2

Page 3: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 3/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.

Welcome to 9500 MPR-E (Microwave Packet Radio) ETSI

R4.0 Node Configuration Operation & Maintenance Section 1 Product Overview

Module 1 Introduction

Module 2 Architecture

Section 2 Functional Description

Module 1 MSS Hardware Architecture

Module 2 ODU300 Hardware Architecture

Module 3 MPT-HC Hardware Architecture

Module 4 MPT-HC V2 Hardware Architecture

Module 5 MPT-MC Hardware Architecture

Section 3 NE Operation

Module 1 TCO Operator Interface

Module 2 Equipment Views & SettingsModule 3 Cross-Connection Configurations

Module 4 Performance Monitoring

Section 4 Maintenance

Module 1 Fault Management

Module 2 Protection

Module 3 Software Download

Section 5 Terms

Module 1 Acronyms

 Appendix A 

Module 1 Initial Configuration

 Appendix B

Module 1 MPR Management

Page 3

Page 4: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 4/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.

Welcome to 9500 MPR-E (Microwave Packet Radio) ETSI

R4.0 Node Configuration Operation & Maintenance Upon completion of this course, you should be able to:

z Describe the basic concepts of the 9500 MPR z Turn-up and provision the systemz Respond to and manage alarm conditionsz Monitor system and application status

z Maintain 9500 MPR hardware and software

Your feedback is appreciated!

Please feel free to Email your comments to: 

[email protected] 

Please include the following training reference in your email:

TWT42025 Edition 2.0 

Thank you!

Page 4

Page 5: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 5/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Page 5

Page 6: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 6/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Page 6

Page 7: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 7/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Page 7

Page 8: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 8/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Page 8

Page 9: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 9/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.

This page intentionally left blank

Page 9

Page 10: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 10/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Page 10

Page 11: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 11/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 1

Page 12: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 12/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.4 2012-06-14 AL University First edition

4.0 2012-09-15 AL University Updated for release 4.0

Page 13: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 13/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 3

Page 14: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 14/1149

Page 15: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 15/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 5

Page

1 Understanding the 9500MPR Innovations 71.1 Classification of the New Generation Products 81.2 Presentation 91.3 Multiservice Aggregation Layer 121.4 Service Awareness 131.5 Packet Node 141.6 Service-driven Packet Adaptive Modulation 151.7 Power Consumption Reduction 161.8 Hybrid or Packet Mode: for Efficient Data Transport 17 2 MPR in New Market Segments 192.1 The Most Effective Solution 202.2 MPR-e Enabling Zero-Footprint Microwave Configurations 222.3 MPR in Last Mile 23

2.4 LTE and Full Ethernet 3G Ready 242.5 From Current PDH/SDH Network to Packet Transport Network Evolution 252.6 MPR addresses All Microwave Applications in Aggregation 262.7 MPR addresses Metro Ring/Partial Mesh Application 27 3 System Description 293.1 Alcatel-Lucent 9500 Microwave Packet Radio 303.2 9500 MPR System Family 313.3 9500 MPR Key Features 333.4 9500 MPR Node 35 4 Radio Configuration 454.1 Radio Configuration 46 5 System Configuration 475.1 Example of System configurations 48 

6 Management Systems 536.1 Network Management 54

Page 16: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 16/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 6

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 17: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 17/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 7

Page 18: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 18/1149

Page 19: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 19/1149

Page 20: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 20/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 10

Page 21: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 21/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Multiservice aggregation layer - the capacity to use Ethernet as a common transmission layer totransport any kind of traffic, independently by the type of interface. Ethernet becomes the convergencelayer.

• Service awareness - traffic handling and quality management, queuing traffic according to the type of service assigned, independently by the type of interface

• Packet node - no service aggregation limits with all traffic aggregated in packets, in term of: capacity,type of service requirements and type of interface

• Service-driven adaptive modulation- fully exploit the air bandwidth in its entirety by changingmodulation scheme according to the propagation availability and allocate transport capacity, discriminatingtraffic by different services, only possible in a packet-based environment

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 11

Page 22: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 22/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• 9500 MPR aggregates and carries over a COMMON PACKET LAYER : TDM 2G, 3G, LTE and IP/Ethernet.This allows sharing of common packet transmission infrastructures, regardless of the nature of carried traffic.

• Due to the nature of Ethernet, each service can be discriminated based on several parameters like quality of service.

• Mapping different access technologies over Ethernet is achieved by standardized protocols like circuitemulation and pseudo-wire.

• R99 - original standard for UMTS WCDMA based networks

• HSDPA (High Speed Data Packet Access) - add on to R99/UMTS networks which adds a shared high speeddownlink packet channel

• ISAM (Indexed Sequential Access Method) - a method for indexing data for fast retrieval

• UMTS (Universal Mobile Telecommunications System – 3rd generation mobile cellular technology for GSM-based networks.

• WCDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access) – interface standard found in 3G mobiletelecommunications networks.

• WiMAX (Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access) - telecommunications protocol that provides fixedand mobile Internet access

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 12

Page 23: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 23/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

zService awareness means the ability to discriminate the different traffic types carried over the converged

Ethernet stream. Our traffic flow can be composed of E1, E3, STM-1, ATM, DS1, DS3, and/or IP/Eth, comingfrom different sources, and therefore having different requirements. For instance, DS1 or ATM traffic from a3G base station can carry voice (high priority, real time service) and data (lower priority and possibly non realtime with high variability load, such as internet browsing, music download or video streaming).

zService awareness is what allows identifying the traffic types, and in the case of non real time variable bitrate one, optimize the band with overbooking of the radio scarce resource.

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 13

Page 24: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 24/1149

Page 25: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 25/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Traffic with high priority will always have bandwidth available, like voice (deterministic approach)

• Broadband traffic is discriminated by QoS dynamically, with modulation scheme changes driven bypropagation conditions.

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 15

Page 26: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 26/1149

Page 27: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 27/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 17

Page 28: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 28/1149

Page 29: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 29/1149

Page 30: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 30/1149

Page 31: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 31/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 21

Page 32: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 32/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 22

Page 33: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 33/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Extended 9500 MPR packet transport family to cover last mile access Î MSS-1c

Low cost, ½ rack length, Very low power consumption, MW radio protection, Hybrid & Packet operational modes

• Multipurpose ODU Î the MPT; to cover all MW applications under a single platform

Zero foot print for Ethernet applications, common to all MSS platform, enables integrated solution for MPLS metronetwork 

• Introducing 9500 MPR-e Î stand-alone “full outdoor”  

• Existing compatibility with 9500 MXC

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 23

Page 34: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 34/1149

Page 35: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 35/1149

Page 36: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 36/1149

Page 37: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 37/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 27

Page 38: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 38/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 28

Page 39: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 39/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 29

Page 40: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 40/1149

Page 41: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 41/1149

Page 42: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 42/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• 9500 MPR in the stand alone (zero-footprint) architecture is built by only one unit for Ethernet applications:

• Outdoor Unit.

• Outdoor Unit is connected to the MPLS metro networks equipment with one coaxial cable for the powersupply and one Ethernet optical or electrical cable (with MPT).

• 9500 MPR in the split mount architecture is built by two separate units:

• MSS (Microwave Service Switch): indoor unit for split mount and stand alone configurations (Ethernetuplink)

• Outdoor Unit.

• MSS and Outdoor Unit are connected with a single standard coaxial cable (with ODU300) or with onecoaxial cable for the power supply and one Ethernet optical or electrical cable (with MPT).

• Up to 6 ODU300 can be connected to an MSS-8

• Up to 2 ODU300 can be connected to an MSS-4

• Up to 18 MPT can be connected to an MSS-8. Up to 8 can be powered directly by the MSS-8 shelf.

• Up to 14 MPT can be connected to an MSS-4

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 32

Page 43: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 43/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 33

Page 44: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 44/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Link Aggregation groups a set of ports so that two network nodes can be interconnected usingmultiple links to increase link capacity and availability between them.

• When aggregated, two or more physical links operate as a single logical link with a trafficcapacity that is the sum of the individual link capacities.

• This doubling, tripling or quadrupling of capacity is relevant where more capacity is requiredthan can be provided on one physical link.

• Link aggregation also provides redundancy between the aggregated links. If a link fails, itstraffic is redirected onto the remaining link, or links.

• If the remaining link or links do not have the capacity needed to avoid a traffic bottleneck,appropriate QoS settings are used to prioritize traffic so that all high priority traffic continues to

get through.• The Link Aggregation is performed according to 802.3ad and can be applied to Radio ports and

to User Ethernet ports.

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 34

Page 45: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 45/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The 9500 MPR Node supports up to 18 RF links for operation on the same or different frequency bands usingthe MSS-8.

• The ODU for each link is connected to a plug-in card inside the site aggregator.

• Other plug-in cards provide line interface access (TDM and native IP), management, and so on.

• 9500 MPR Node supports a mix of non-protected and protected or diversity operation for single link, repeater orstar radio configurations.

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 35

Page 46: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 46/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Microwave Service Switch - 4/8 (MSS-4 / MSS-8)

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 36

Page 47: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 47/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

Supports unprotected or protected links

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 37

Page 48: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 48/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 38

Page 49: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 49/1149

Page 50: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 50/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 40

Page 51: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 51/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• 32E1/DS1 card: provides the external interfaces for up to 32xE1/T1 tributaries, manages theencapsulation/reconstruction of PDH data to/from standard Ethernet packets and sends/receives standardEthernet packets to/from both Core-E modules.

•  ASAP card: provides external interfaces to transport 16xE1 ATM traffic, with E1/IMA physical layer, in an MPR network. ATM traffic is transported within MPR network as "special" Ethernet traffic. This traffic is managed bythe MPR using RFC 4717 (IETF ATM PseudoWire EdgetoEdgeeEmulation, PWE3) with N-1 encapsulation format.

•  AUX card: provides the external interfaces for Service Channels access and Housekeeping alarms.

• STM-1 card: provides the external interfaces for up to 2 electrical or optical STM-1 signals, manages theencapsulation/reconstruction of SDH data to/from standard Ethernet packets and sends/receives standardEthernet packets to/from both Core-E modules.

• EAS Peripheral (P8ETH) card: provides access for customer Ethernet traffic and supports the following traffic

external interfaces:• 4xEthernet 10/100/1000 Base-T

• 4xEthernet SFP 4x1000 Base-X optical, Base-T, or Copper Cable access directly available on the EASmodule. Interfaces can be 1000BASE-LX (GbE LX 10 km) or 1000BASE-SX (GbE SX 550 m) or 1000BASE-CX (GbE CX 25 m)

• Modem 300: this unit is used to interface the ODU300. It sends/receives standard Ethernet packets to/fromboth Core-E modules, manages the radio frame (on Ethernet packet form) generation/termination, the interfaceto/from the alternate Radio module (for RPS management), the cable interface functions to ODU; it containsthe logic for the EPS Core-E protection, the RPS logic.

• MPT access card (with PFoE): this unit is used to interface the MPT. PFoE (Power Feed over Ethernet) is used tocarry the power supply to the MPT-HC through an electrical Ethernet traffic connector.

• The optional +24 Vdc/-48 Vdc Converter unit (to be installed in transport slot 4, 6 or 8 of MSS-8 can be used topower the MSS for +24 Vdc office applications.

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 41

Page 52: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 52/1149

Page 53: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 53/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• With the Core protection max. 3 MSS can be interconnected as shown in figure.

• To implement this configuration the LOS alarm on the Ethernet ports must be enabled as switching criterion of the Core protection. To enable this alarm the “Ethernet LOS Criteria” feature has to be enabled. 

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 43

Page 54: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 54/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 44

Page 55: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 55/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 45

Page 56: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 56/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• The 1+1 configuration with MPT-MC does not require any interconnection cable between the two ODUs.

• The 1+1 configuration with MPT-HC, MPT-HC V2, MPT-XP, or 9558HC can be implemented with or withoutan interconnection cable between the two ODUs.

• In 1+1 configuration the 2 ODUs must be of the same types.

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 46

Page 57: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 57/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 47

Page 58: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 58/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 48

Page 59: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 59/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 49

Page 60: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 60/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 50

Page 61: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 61/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 51

Page 62: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 62/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 52

Page 63: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 63/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 53

Page 64: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 64/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Providing a single managed network reduce the operational expenditure of a network directly improving themargin in the P&L of an Operator.

•  Alcatel-Lucent offers a unified management system capable to manage the entire access and transportnetwork under a single Network Management Suite: the 1350 OMS.

• 9500 MPR together with all other Microwave and Optical transmission Network Element is fully integratedinto 1350 OMS Network Management System providing all the tools required to operate the network.

• 9500 MPR can also be managed by Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM.

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 54

Page 65: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 65/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

9500 MPR can be managed:

• by Alcatel-Lucent 1350 OMS Network Management System,

• by Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM.

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 55

Page 66: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 66/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 56

Page 67: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 67/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page intentionally left blank 

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 57

Page 68: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 68/1149

Page 69: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 69/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 1

Page 70: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 70/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.4 2012-07-01 AL University First edition

4.0 2012-09-14 AL University Updated for Release 4.0

Page 71: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 71/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 3

Page 72: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 72/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 4

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 73: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 73/1149

Page 74: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 74/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 6

Page

Page 75: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 75/1149

Page 76: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 76/1149

Page 77: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 77/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 9

Page 78: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 78/1149

Page 79: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 79/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• MPT-HC V2 is similar to MPT-HC from architecture standpoint and can be used as spare part of the MPT-HC.The differences are:

• MPT-HC V2 can be natively Ethernet powered through a proprietary PFoE (or as alternative by using twocables, one coaxial cable for the Power Supply and one optical cable for the Ethernet Traffic (as MPT-HC).

• MPT-HC V2 is XPIC-ready (by the installation of a dedicated module).

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 11

Page 80: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 80/1149

Page 81: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 81/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

zMPT Access Card PoE

z2 MPT per MPT Access Card

2x 1000BaseT port with Power over CAT5e cable(Electrical connectivity Data+Power over a single CAT cable)

2x SFP ports for optical connection option

2x Coax connection(power feed in case of Optical connection)

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 13

Page 82: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 82/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Pigtail: N-RJ45 two wires Transition Connector.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 14

Page 83: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 83/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

MPT-HC must be connected to a fuse or a breaker on a customer power distribution box. The recommended valueis 3 Amps.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 15

Page 84: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 84/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• One electrical Ethernet cable connects an MPT Access unit in the MSS to its MPT-HC V2 (the MPT Access unitprovides the PFoE).

• The max cable length is 100 m.

• The Ethernet electrical cable is provided with connectors to be mounted on site with the specific RJ45 tool(1AD160490001).

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 16

Page 85: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 85/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Two cables connect an MPT Access unit in the MSS to its MPT-HC V2:

• One cable is a 50 ohm coaxial cable to send the power supply to the MPT-HC V2:

• for length lower or equal to 100 m the power cable can be CAT5E cable to send the power supply tothe MPT-HC V2 . The Ethernet electrical cable is provided with connectors to be mounted on site withthe specific RJ45 tool (1AD160490001);

• for length higher than 100m, the cable is a 50 ohm coaxial cable to send the power supply to the MPT-HC V2

Note: In case of length lower than 100m and presence in the field of 1 coaxial already installed and free it isrecommended to use the coax cable to minimize the installation effort.

• The second cable is an Ethernet optical cable.

• The Ethernet optical cable is preassembled and available in different lengths (up to 450 m).

Note: A special cord adapter must be connected to the coaxial cable on the MPT-HC V2.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 17

Page 86: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 86/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Two cables connect an MPT Access unit in the MSS to its MPT-HC V2:

• One cable is a 50 ohm coaxial cable to send the power supply to the MPT-HC V2:

for length lower or equal to 100 m the power cable can be CAT5E cable to send the power supply tothe MPT-HC V2 . The Ethernet electrical cable is provided with connectors to be mounted on site withthe specific RJ45 tool (1AD160490001);

for length higher than 100m, the cable is a 50 ohm coaxial cable to send the power supply to the MPT-HC V2

Note: In case of length lower than 100m and presence in the field of 1 coaxial already installed and free it isrecommended to use the coax cable to minimize the installation effort.

• The second cable is an Ethernet optical cable.

The Ethernet optical cable is preassembled and available in different lengths (up to 350 m).

Note: A special cord adapter must be connected to the coaxial cable on the MPT-HC V2.

Note: MPT-HC V2 must be connected to a fuse or a breaker on a customer power distribution box. Therecommended value is 3 Amps.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 18

Page 87: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 87/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Two cables connect the MPT:

• one optical cable connected to port#5 or port #6 of the Core-E unit

• a coaxial cable connected to the station battery to provide the power supply.

• MPT-HC V2 must be connected to a fuse or a breaker on a customer power distribution box. The recommendedvalue is 3 Amps.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 19

Page 88: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 88/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Both injectors include:

• Powering of two MPT

• Lightning protection

• DC protection

• LEDs for power output

Power Injector plug-in

Power Injector box

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 20

Page 89: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 89/1149

Page 90: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 90/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 22

Page 91: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 91/1149

Page 92: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 92/1149

Page 93: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 93/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Definition: This service identifies a flow inside MPR network, in which E1/T1 is transported,switched and terminated.

•  Application: Typical microwave 2G backhauling application, in which E1/T1s are terminatedbefore entering into aggregation network.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 25

Page 94: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 94/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Definition: E1/T1 TDM input signals are packetized according to MEF8 standard; E1/T1s aretransported, switched and provided to an external ETH network in standard format (MEF-8).

•  Application: Typical microwave 2G backhauling application, in which E1/T1s are terminatedbefore entering into aggregation network, where aggregation network is a packet network.E1/T1s are not terminated at the end of the microwave backhauling and an end-to-end circuitemulation services could be established between 9500 MPR and the service router in front of BSC/RNC

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 26

Page 95: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 95/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Definition: This service identifies a flow inside MPR network, in which STM-1 is transparentlytransported, switched and terminated.

•  Application: Typical microwave transport application.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 27

Page 96: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 96/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Definition: Ethernet traffic is transported and switched automatically by the standard auto-learning algorithm of the built-in MPR 10 Gbit Ethernet switch.

•  Application: Typical microwave 3G backhauling/WiMax application, in which transport of Ethernet packets coming from base stations is requested.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 28

Page 97: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 97/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 29

Page 98: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 98/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH profiles are managed in compliancy with Metro Ethernet Forum specifications

• MEF 8- Implementation Agreement for the Emulation of PDH Circuits over Metro Ethernet Networks

• Same behavior than PDH/SDH transmission devices (QoS)

• Reduced impact of the “packetization” overhead 

• Same Radio performances than PDH/SDH devices

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 30

Page 99: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 99/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

Case 1 for E1/T1 (TDM2TDM over MPR network) 

• The E1/T1 stream is inserted in Node 1 and extracted in Node 2. In this case the two IWFs used topacketize the traffic for the Ethernet switch in the Core-E module are both internal to the 9500 MPR network.The Circuit Emulation Service is TDM2TDM in Node 1 and Node 2. The Cross connections are PDH-Radiotype. 

Case 1 for STM-1 (SDH2SDH) 

• The STM-1 stream is inserted in Node 1 and extracted in Node 2. In this case the two IWFs used to

packetize the traffic for the Ethernet switch in the Core-E module are both internal to the 9500 MPR network.The Circuit Emulation Service is SDH2SDH in Node 1 and Node 2. The Cross connections are SDH-Radio type. 

Case 2 (TDM2Eth) 

• The E1/T1 stream is inserted in Node 1 and extracted in Node 2. One IWF is inside the 9500 MPR, thesecond IWF is external to the 9500 MPR-E network. The Circuit Emulation Service is TDM2ETH in Node 1 andNode 2. The Cross connections are PDH-Radio type in Node 1 and Radio-Eth type in Node 2. 

Case 3 (TDM2Eth) 

• The E1/T1 stream is inserted/extracted in Node 1. One IWF is inside the 9500 MPR, but the second IWF isexternal to the 9500 MPR network. The Circuit Emulation Service is TDM2ETH in Node 1 and Node 2. TheCross connections to be implemented are PDH-Eth type in Node 1.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 31

Page 100: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 100/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Cases 4 and 5 (ETH2ETH) 

• In these cases Ethernet packets enter Node 1 and are extracted in Node 2. In case 4 the Ethernet packetsencapsulate the E1 stream; in case 5 the packets are native Ethernet packets. None of the IWFs belongs tothe 9500 MPR network. The Circuit Emulation Service is ETH2ETH in Node 1 and Node 2. No Crossconnections must be implemented. The path is automatically implemented with the standard auto-learningalgorithm of the 9500 MPR Ethernet switch. 

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 32

Page 101: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 101/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

Case 6 for E1/T1 (TDM2TDM over Ethernet) 

• The E1/T1 stream is inserted in Node 1 and extracted in Node 2. In this case the two IWFs usedto packetize the traffic for the Ethernet switch in the Core-E module are both internal to the 9500MPR network. The Circuit Emulation Service is TDM2TDM in Node 1 and Node 2. The Crossconnections are PDH-Eth type. 

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 33

Page 102: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 102/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Flow Id present (user defined)

• intermediate node configuration (E1/T1 provisioning):

• node by node (building Cross-connection tables based on Flow Id)

• bandwidth guaranteed (according to QoS Æ Highest Queue Priority association)

• no flooding-autolearning necessary

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 34

Page 103: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 103/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• ECID = Emulated Circuit Identifier

• IWF = Inter-Working Function

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 35

Page 104: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 104/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Flow Id present (user defined)

• all the parameters must be configured compliant with the MEF8 standard

• adaptive or differential clock recovery supported

• bandwidth guaranteed (according to QoS Æ Highest Queue Priority association)

• destination MAC added before going into whole network (MEF8 compliant)

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 36

Page 105: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 105/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• ECID = Emulated Circuit Identifier

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 37

Page 106: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 106/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Flow Id present (user defined)

• If there are intermediate nodes in each node build the Cross-connection tables based on Flow Id.

• Bandwidth guaranteed (according to QoS Æ Highest Queue Priority association)

• No flooding-autolearning necessary

• Both the IWFs belong to 9500 MPR-E and the packets are not supposed to exit the 9500 MPR-E network.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 38

Page 107: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 107/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 39

Page 108: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 108/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 40

Page 109: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 109/1149

Page 110: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 110/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

• In figure is shown a more detailed block diagram of the ASAP unit in Ingress.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 42

Page 111: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 111/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

•  Any packet belonging to an Eth2Eth TDM flow is treated as any other Ethernet packet with the onlyexception of giving it an higher priority based on the MEF 8 Ethertype.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 43

Page 112: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 112/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 44

Page 113: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 113/1149

Page 114: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 114/1149

Page 115: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 115/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 47

Page 116: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 116/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• 9500MPR uses a Connection Admission Control (CAC) for committed services and two schedulers inseries (on Core embedded L2 switch and on Radio peripheral)

• The two schedulers need to jointly interoperate to guarantee determistic behavior of the services

• The QoS function inside 9500 MPR-E is the result of a distributed implementation in the switch in the Core-Eunit and Radio Interface unit. Both those QoS functions are properly configured in order to get the wishedbehavior on Ethernet flows that will be transmitted towards the Radio.

• The QoS configuration is the same for all the involved units:

• Core-E

• EAS

• Modem unit (to interface the ODU300)

• MPT-HC/MPT-HC V2/MPT-MC

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 48

Page 117: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 117/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• In the figure is shown an overview of the QoS implementation inside the Core-E unit and Modem unit whichis used to interface the ODU300.

• The QoS feature provides eight internal queues to support different traffic priorities. The QoS function canassign the packet to one of the eight egress transmit queues.

• Queue 8 is assigned to TDM2TDM traffic (fixed assignment)

• Queue 7 is assigned to TDM2Eth traffic (fixed assignment)

• Queue 6 is assigned to TMN (fixed assignment)

• Queues 1 to 5 are assigned to Ethernet traffic according to the information inside the packet as 802.1pfield or DiffServ field.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 49

Page 118: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 118/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 50

Page 119: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 119/1149

Page 120: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 120/1149

Page 121: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 121/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• In case the configuration of radio interfaces changes from 1+0 to 1+1, the Radio QoS of Spareinterface takes the queue sizes of the Radio QoS of Main interface. The previous configuration of queue sizes of the Radio QoS of Spare interface is lost.

• In case of the configuration of radio interfaces changes from 1+1 to 1+0, the Radio QoS of Maininterface maintains the previous configuration of queue sizes, while the Spare interface takes thedefault queue sizes according to the configured Modem Profile.

• When a radio port is added to the L1 LAG port, all custom QoS and queue size configuration islost.

• When a radio port is removed from a L1 LAG port, the NE QoS settings are applied to the radio

port. The queue sizes are set to the default values.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 53

Page 122: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 122/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• In order to give an estimation of the maximum delay, that an Ethernet frame can experiencewhen entering the specific queue in case of congestion of radio interface, the WebEML shows aread-only value, which is the queue size configured by the operator converted in a time value(msec).

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 54

Page 123: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 123/1149

Page 124: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 124/1149

Page 125: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 125/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 57

Page 126: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 126/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 58

Page 127: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 127/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 59

Page 128: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 128/1149

Page 129: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 129/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 61

Page 130: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 130/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 62

Page 131: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 131/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• In this example, user traffic is split up into radio channels. Main advantages:

• Throughput. The overall radio Ethernet throughput is more than 1 Gbit/sec (4 x 350 Mbit/s,being this the value for 256QAM@56 MHz)

• Protection. In case of a failure of one of the three channels, all the traffic is redirected onthe remaining link (with a throughput of around 0.35 Gbit/sec). The discarded or droppedtraffic is the one with lower priority: high priority traffic is still running on the remainingactive channels.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 63

Page 132: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 132/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• In Layer1 Link Aggregation, the Distributor performs a packet-based traffic distribution overmultiple links regardless of the content of the packets.

• The Distributor takes into account the number of bytes sent over a specific link and loads linksaccording to the available bandwidth. As a consequence, Layer1 Link Aggregation allows a trafficload balancing independently of traffic content. Since the distribution does not depend on Layer2or Layer3 header content, this kind of Link Aggregation is called Layer1 (i.e., associated to thephysical layer).

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 64

Page 133: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 133/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The following radio configurations are supported:

• 1+0 MPT-HC connected to P8ETH SFP port

• 1+0 MPT-HL connected to P8ETH SFP port

• 1+1 MPT-HL connected to P8ETH SFP port 

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 65

Page 134: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 134/1149

Page 135: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 135/1149

Page 136: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 136/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

One MPT per MPT plug-in.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 68

Page 137: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 137/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

The Ethernet ports involved in a LAG cannot be used as TMN In-band interface.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 69

Page 138: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 138/1149

Page 139: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 139/1149

Page 140: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 140/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 72

Page 141: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 141/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 73

Page 142: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 142/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 74

Page 143: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 143/1149

Page 144: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 144/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 76

Page 145: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 145/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• On the radio channel, a 9500 MPR transfers the reference clock to an adjacent MPR device through the radiocarrier frequency at physical layer.

• This method offers two main advantages:

• No bandwith is consumed for the synchronization distribution,

• Total immunity to the network load.

• End-to-end scenarios where time-of-day/phase alignment are requested are fully supported, as 1588 PTP v2is carried transparently by MPR across the microwave backhauling network.

• Both for Hybrid and Packet working modes, the Clock can be received at hand-off or delivered at the cell site.Synch-Eth, E1, PDH and BITS clock modes are available.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 77

Page 146: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 146/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• The availability of the Clock in the Network represents the most common scenario, characterized by a timesource available at the ingress of the microwave backhauling network, derived from the primary referenceclock.

• Synchronization (frequency) is delivered to the cell site using any of the options available on MPR, dependingon the operator’s need. Worth repeating ingress and egress methods can be mixed (i.e. Synch-Eth at theingress, E1/T1 at the egress) via a simple configuration.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 78

Page 147: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 147/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• 9500 MPR has an embedded reference clock which is distributed to each board of the network element.

• Such clock is generated in the Clock Reference Unit (CRU) of the core unit (controller).

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 79

Page 148: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 148/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Differential: used in case of clock distribution on the whole network. It’s more reliable than Adaptive; alsoused in TDM2TDM traffic (MPR to MPR).

•  Adaptive: simpler network, but performances depends on the PDV (Packet Delay Variation) in the Network. Always used when the reference clock isn’t distributed on the whole network.

• Node Timing: this feature (called either “network clock re-timing” or “node timing” or, according to G. 8261wording, “network -synchronous operation for service clock”) introduces an additional possibility to recover E1clock.

• Node timing is a way to recover TDM clock quite popular in the industry of service routers and siteaggregator boxes. This feature inside the 9500 MPR platform is adding interworking capabilities withthird parties service routers and circuit emulations gateway.

• In node-timing working mode, all the E1s are re-sampled with the network element clock. This meansthat, as also reported in G8261, this method does not preserve the service timing (E1 clock).

• Recovered E1 clock is according to G. 823 synchronization masks.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 80

Page 149: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 149/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• In meshed networks (rings) do not close the synchronization configuration.

• If the NODE TIMING is enabled, the CT still propose the possible selection between ACR andDCR: in this specific case, the meaning of this option is not related to the clock recoveryalgorithms but rather to the MRF8 frame format.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 81

Page 150: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 150/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Differential clock recovery

• Common reference clock IS available at both Ends.

• IWF system, at RX side, generate output clock based on RTP TimeStamps which are sent together witheach Fragments.

•  Adaptative clock recovery

• Common reference clock is NOT available at both Ends.

• IWF system, at RX side, generate output clock based on data arrival rate: TDM clock is slowly adjustedto maintain the average fill level of a jitter buffer at its midpoint.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 82

Page 151: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 151/1149

Page 152: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 152/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 84

Page 153: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 153/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 85

Page 154: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 154/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Each Module will mute its own Synchronization clock in case of Fail Alarm.

• For each available sync source, the CRU detects the signal Degrade Alarm on each available syncsource. Such Signal Degrade alarm raises also in case of muted (missing) clock.

• The Signal Degrade Alarm relevant to the selected Synchronization Source, or the relevant CardFail, causes the switching of the Synchronization Source.

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 86

Page 155: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 155/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 87

Page 156: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 156/1149

Page 157: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 157/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 89

Page 158: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 158/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• The cross-connections between slots and between slot and Ethernet user ports are realized with a Layer-2Ethernet Switch inside the Main Core-E.

• The decision made by the switch to forward the received packet is based on the destination MAC address.

• Each E1 /T1can be cross connected independently

• E1/T1s can be cross connected to any of the following interfaces:

• Radio interface

• Ethernet interface

• Each E1/T1 (board #, port #) must be associated to a signal flow ID

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 90

Page 159: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 159/1149

Page 160: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 160/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 92

Page 161: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 161/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 1

Page 162: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 162/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 2

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.4 2012-07-01 AL University First edition

4.0 2012-09-14 AL University Updated for Release 4.0

Page 163: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 163/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 3

Page 164: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 164/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 4

Page 165: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 165/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 5

Page

1 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-8) 71.1 MSS-8 Overview 81.2 MSS-8 Cards 9 2 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-4) 112.1 MSS-4 Overview 122.2 MSS-4 Cards 13 3 Control and Switching Module/Core-E 153.1 CSM-E/Core-E Card 163.2 CSM-E/Core-E Card Block Diagram 213.3 CSM-E/Core-E Card Status LED 223.4 CSM-E/Core-E Card LEDs 23 4 Ethernet Access Switch/P8ETH 254.1 P8ETH/EAS Card 26

4.2 P8ETH/EAS Card Block Diagram 274.3 P8ETH/EAS Card Status LED 284.4 EAS/P8ETH Card LEDs 29 5 P32E1DS1 (DS1/PDH) Card 315.1 P32E1DS1 (DS1/PDH) Card 325.2 P32E1DS1 (DS1/PDH) Card Block Diagram 335.3 P32E1DS1 (DS1/PDH) Card Status LED 34 6 MPTACC Card 356.1 MPTACC Card 366.2 MPTACC Card Block Diagram 376.3 MPTACC Card Status LED 386.4 MPTACC Card LEDs 39 7 MOD300 Card 41

7.1 MOD300 Card 427.2 MOD300 Card Block Diagram 437.3 MOD300 Card Status LED 447.4 MOD300 Card LEDs 45 8 AUX Card 478.1 AUX Card 488.2 AUX Card Block Diagram 498.3 AUX Card Status LED 508.4 AUX Card LEDs 51 9 2xSTM-1 Local Access Card 539.1 2xSTM-1 Local Access Card 549.2 2xSTM-1 Local Access Card Block Diagram 55 10 ASAP Card 57

10.1 ASAP Card 5810.2 ASAP Card Block Diagram 5910.3 ASAP Card Status LED 6010.4 ASAP Card LEDs 61 11 Fan Card 6311.1 Fan Card 6411.2 Fan 2U Card with Alarms LEDs 65 12 +24/-48 Volt Power Converter 6712.1 +24/-48 Volt Power Converter 68 13 Power Extractor 6913.1 Power Extractor 70 14 Power Injector 7114.1 Power Injector 72

14.2 Power Injector Plug-in 7314.3 LEDs 74 15 MPT power unit 75

Page 166: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 166/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Page

15.1 MPT power unit 7615.2 MPT power unit block diagram 7815.3 LEDs 79 16 MPT extended power unit 8116.1 MPT extended power unit 8216.2 MPT extended power unit block diagram 8416.3 LEDs 85 17 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-1c) 8717.1 MSS-1c 8817.2 MSS-1c Block Diagram 8917.3 MSS-1c Status LED 9017.4 MSS-1c 91 18 Distributors/Patch Panels 93

18.1 E1/T1 RJ-45 120 Ohm Patch Panel 9418.2 32E1 SCSI 75 Ohm Patch Panel 9518.3 E1/T1 Tributaries (Protected Pair) 9618.4 E1/T1 D-Connector Patch Panel 97

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 6

Page 167: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 167/1149

Page 168: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 168/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 8

Page 169: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 169/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

General Rules: 

• One CSM-E/Core-E card is required (unprotected)

• Can be protected with 2nd CSM-E/Core-E

• One Flash card is required for every CSM-E/Core-E card

• Fan card provides Major/Minor relay alarms and a Summary Relay for Major or Minor (usually tied toPDU).

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 9

Page 170: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 170/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page intentionally left blank 

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 10

Page 171: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 171/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 11

Page 172: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 172/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 12

Page 173: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 173/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

General Rules: 

• One CSM-E/Core-E card is required (unprotected)

• Can be protected with 2nd CSM-E/Core-E

• One Flash card is required for every CSM-E/Core-E card

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 13

Page 174: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 174/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page intentionally left blank 

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 14

Page 175: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 175/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 15

Page 176: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 176/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Gigabit Ethernet serial internal interfaces between CSM-E/Core-E and peripherals

• CSM-E/Core-E Macro Functions:

• Controller

• Layer 2+ Ethernet Switch, VLAN management and MAC based

• Ethernet MAC learning

• Cross-connect function for PDH and Data payload traffic;

• For any “packetized” flow, the switch will be in charge to also manage the EquipmentProtection Switching (EPS).

• Quality of Service (QoS) management.

• Selection of the synchronization clock to be distributed to each plug-in.

• The flash card stores the license, equipment software, equipment MIB, and equipment MACaddress.

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 16

Page 177: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 177/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 17

Page 178: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 178/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

The SFP must be installed after the Configuration File has been downloaded. If the SFP has beeninstalled before, withdraw it and then installed it again.

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 18

Page 179: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 179/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

For the correct operation of the EoSDH SFP it is necessary to disable the autonegotiation viaWebEML or via the Configuration File.

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 19

Page 180: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 180/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 20

Page 181: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 181/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Based on packet technology with 7 GbEth serial internal interfaces between Core-E and peripherals(jumbo frames 9728 bytes allowed)

• The Ethernet ports of the Core-E can be configured in two ways:

• to be used as GigaEthernet interface for Ethernet traffic (Note: for port#5 and port#6 the optionalSFP must be installed);

• to be used to connect an MPT: MPT-HC (ETSI), MPT-HCV2, or MPT-MC (ETSI) to port#1 toport#4; an MPT-HC only to port#5 and port#6.

• The Core-E unit has the option to equip two SFPs (in port #5, port #6). These ports can be also usedto connect directly an MPT-HC/MPT-HCV2.

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 21

Page 182: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 182/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• The CSM-E/Core-E consists of microprocessor and Ethernet switch circuits. The Ethernet Switchprovides a Quality of Service (QOS) mechanism to control all streams.

• If QoS is disabled, all traffic inside the switch has the same priority. This means that for each switchport there is only one queue, first in, first out (FIFO)

• Three QoS settings in GUI are available as follows:

• Disabled

• 802.1 priorities are set based on IEEE 802.1D-2004 Annex G User Priorities and Traffic Classesthat defines seven traffic types and corresponding user priority values.

• DiffServ priorities are based on one of eight tags, each identifying one of eight traffic types andcorresponding user priority values.

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 22

Page 183: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 183/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Check front-panel LED indications

INDICATOR STATUS DEFINITION

Link (L) Off Link Down

Green Link Up

 Activity (A) Off No Tx/Rx activity

Blinking Yellow Tx/Rx activity

NE Major Alarm (M) Red At least one alarm is present on the NE with major severity is present on the NE

NE Minor Alarm (m) Red At least one alarm is present on the NE with minor severity is present on the NE

NE Warning Alarm (W) Yellow At least one alarm is present on the NE with warning severity is present on the NE

NE Abnormal Condition (A) Yellow At least one abnormal condition is present on the NE

Status (S) Off Card not equipped, not provisioned, or not powered

Green Blinking Download, software Booting, or flash card realignment in progress

Green In Service, Normal Operation, and Properly Provisioned

 Yellow In protect, properly provisioned as EPS

Red Card fail

Blinking Red Card mismatch

•  Always check to see if symptoms match the alarm.

• LEDs provide summary alarm indications, which can help narrow down the location and type of failure.

• The LEDs on the CSM-E/Core-E front panel for each Ethernet connector are a good indicator of correct connectivity and activity on

the Ethernet port.

• Where a Status LED on a plug-in is off (unlit), but power to the MSS-8 is confirmed by LEDs on other plug-ins, check the seating of the affected plug-in.

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 23

Page 184: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 184/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page intentionally left blank 

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 24

Page 185: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 185/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 25

Page 186: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 186/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

MSS-8 shelf:

• Supports three protected pairs of P8ETH/EAS cards or six unprotected P8ETH/EAS cards.

• P8ETH/EAS is supported in slots 3-8 for unprotected radio configurations.

• In protected radio configurations, a pair of P8ETH/EASs are required.

• The main P8ETH/EAS is equipped in slots 3, 5, or 7

• The protect (spare) P8ETH/EAS is equipped in slots 4, 6, or 8 directly across from the main.

• The protect card protects the radio if the main fails.

MSS-4 shelf:

• Supports one protected pair of P8ETH/EAS cards or two unprotected P8ETH/EAS cards.

• P8ETH/EAS is supported in slots 3 and 4 for unprotected radio configurations.

• In protected radio configurations, a pair of P8ETH/EASs are required.

• The main P8ETH/EAS is equipped in slot 3.

• The protect (spare) P8ETH/EAS is equipped in slot 4 directly across from the main.

• The protect card protects the radio if the main fails.

• MPT-HL – ANSI market

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 26

Page 187: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 187/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• If more than six local Ethernet accesses are required (built into the Core-E), the EAS (P8ETH) offersan additional four 10/100/1000 Ethernet interfaces plus 4 1 GbEth optical

•  An embedded 10 Gbit/sec L2 switch is present on the unit.

• There are four Electrical 10/100/1000 base-T electrical ports and 4 optical SFP (LX and SX).

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 27

Page 188: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 188/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 28

Page 189: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 189/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 29

Page 190: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 190/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page intentionally left blank 

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 30

Page 191: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 191/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 31

Page 192: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 192/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• SAToP: Structure-Agnostic TDM over Packet

• In a radio link containing a DS3 connection, a maximum of five DS1 connections can be assigned. Additional DS1 connections may be added to separate links that do not contain DS3 connections.

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 32

Page 193: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 193/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• In the TX direction, the P32E1DS1 card processes and encapsulates up to 32 input lines into 2Ethernet packets.

• In the RX direction, the P32E1DS1 card extracts data from the Ethernet data packets and processesthe data to provide up to 32 output lines.

• The P32E1DS1 card performs the following macro functions:

• Termination of 32 E1/T1 signals (32 E1/T1 bi-directional interfaces on the front panel)

• Framed E1/T1 bi-directional alarm management

• Encapsulation/Extraction of PDH data flows into/from standard Ethernet packets

• Reconstruction of the original PDH Timing

• Selection of the Active CSM-E/Core-E

• Sending/getting Ethernet packets to the CSM-E/Core-E

• Communication with the Controller for provisioning and status report

• The module communicates with the CSM-E/Core-E Gigabit Ethernet Serial copper bi-directionalinterfaces on the backplane.

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 33

Page 194: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 194/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• There are equipping options for the P32E1DS1.

• Can be equipped in slots 3-8.

• Two are required, the main module in slot 3, 5, or 7 and the protect (spare) module in the slotdirectly across from the main (slot 6 or 8). The protect (spare) P32E1DS1 module protects theE1/T1 stream if the main P32E1DS1 card fails.

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 34

Page 195: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 195/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 35

Page 196: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 196/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

Main functions:

• Provide the power supply interface and the Ethernet interface

• Provide the Power Feed over Ethernet function

• Lightning and surge protection

• Ethernet and power interface supervision

• EPS/HSB management function

• Clock distribution function

• L2 packet based Proprietary clock algorithm

• Ethernet link quality monitor function

• Radio Link Quality notification through MPR Protection Protocol frames

• Communication with Core controller for provisioning and status report

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 36

Page 197: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 197/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The MPT Access Unit is the interface for two MPT: MPT-HC or MPT-MC.

• Two MPT-HC or MPT-MC can be connected to one MPT Access unit.

• The two MPT can be configured in unprotected or protected configuration.

• The connection to the MPT-HC can be realized:

• by using two connectors:

• one DC power Supply connector to send the power supply to the MPT-HC

• one Gigabit Ethernet connector (electrical or optical) to send the Ethernet traffic and theEthernet control frames to the MPT-HC

• or by using only one electrical Ethernet cable with the enabling of the PFoE (Power Feed over

Ethernet) function (Ethernet traffic + Power Supply on the same cable).

• If the optical port has to be used, an SFP plug-in must be installed.

• If has been enabled port #1 (optical or electrical), the associated Power Supply port is #1.

• If has been enabled port #2 (optical or electrical), the associated Power Supply port is #2.

• The connection to the MPT-MC is realized by using only one electrical Ethernet cable with the enablingof the PFoE (Power Feed over Ethernet) function (Ethernet traffic + Power Supply on the same cable).

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 37

Page 198: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 198/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 38

Page 199: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 199/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 39

Page 200: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 200/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 40

Page 201: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 201/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 41

Page 202: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 202/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 42

Page 203: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 203/1149

Page 204: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 204/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 44

Page 205: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 205/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 45

Page 206: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 206/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 46

Page 207: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 207/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 47

Page 208: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 208/1149

Page 209: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 209/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Service Channels access and Housekeeping alarms are available with the optional Auxiliaryperipheral unit.

• The Auxiliary peripheral unit on front panel is equipped with four connectors:

• one connector to manage the Service Channel 1

• one connector to manage the Service Channel 2

• one connector to manage the housekeeping alarms

• one connector for EOW (not used in the current release)

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 49

Page 210: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 210/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

EOW - Engineering Express Order Wire

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 50

Page 211: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 211/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 51

Page 212: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 212/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page intentionally left blank 

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 52

Page 213: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 213/1149

Page 214: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 214/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

•The STM-1 unit can be used in two different working modes, addressing two different network scenarios:

• STM-1 channelized, provision card as SDHCHAN

• STM-1 transparent, provision card as SDHAC

• The STM-1 channelized interface works as a terminal multiplexer; it terminates or originates the SDH frame.It multiplexes NxE1 into an STM-1 electrical/optical line connection. The clock source can be “Loop time” or

 “Node time”. Typical application is a direct connection to SDH add-drop multiplexers (ADMs). STM-1 cardmanages one 155 Mbit/s STM1 interface and up to 63xE1. Standard VC4 mapping of lower-order E1 trafficstreams to/from STM-1 is applied, that means that a VC4 directly maps up to 63xVC12 into an STM-1 signal(in turn each VC12 contains 1xE1).

• Link options include:

• 1+0 non-protected operation

• 1+1 EPS protection (available ONLY with the optical interface)

• When protection of the unit is required (1+1 EPS protection), two STM-1 units must be installed.

• Clock source from the incoming STM-1 signal can be selected as Network Element source clock. In the eventthe clock source is lost, clocking falls back to the internal clock or to other of any synch in options.

• In the Tx direction, the STM-1 Local Access unit processes and encapsulates up to 2xSTM-1 input lines intoan Ethernet packet that is sent to the Core-E card(s).

• In the Rx direction, the STM-1 Local Access unit extracts data from the Ethernet data packets and processesthe data to provide up to 2 STM-1 output lines.

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 54

Page 215: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 215/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 55

Page 216: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 216/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 56

Page 217: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 217/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 57

Page 218: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 218/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• The ASAP card is used to transport 16xE1 ATM traffic, with E1/IMA physical layer.

• The ASAP cards are unprotected (No 1+1 EPS is available).

•  ATM traffic is transported within the MPR network as "special" Ethernet traffic.

• This "special" Ethernet traffic is managed by the MPR using RFC 4717 (IETF ATM PseudoWireEdgetoEdgeeEmulation, PWE3) with N-1 encapsulation format.

•  ATM PW Ethernet traffic is managed by MPR is such a way to emulate the native QoS that wouldbe applied by ATM equipment.

•  VCC mode

It is possible to transport max 48 VC for every IMA group. It is possible to manage VCswitching (= VCI and VPI change)

• It is possible to assign at every VC one specific QoS. Policing and shaping at ATM level hasperformed VC mode only

• The VC of the same class level (CBR / UBR+ / UBR) are managed in the same radio tailthan are available 3 different radio tails

•  VPC mode

• It is possible to transport max 48 VP for every IMA group. It is possible to manage only VPswitching (=only VPI change)

•  All the VC inside the VP must have same QoS (= for ex. all CBR or all UBR)

•The radio QoS (= radio tails) and QoS ATM (=policing and shaping) are managed at VP level.

• The sum of VP + VC configured on a single ASAP card must be <128.

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 58

Page 219: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 219/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

•The 16xE1 ATM streams enter the ASAP unit on the front panel.

•The block diagram is divided into 3 parts:

• LIU/Framer

• Network Processor

• Confederation FPGA 

•The main functions implemented by the LIU/Framer are:

• Internal termination supported: 75 ohm, 120 ohm.

• Line code supported: HDB3.

• Pulse shape: digitally programmable

• Framing to G.704 E1 signals and to CRC-4 multi-frame alignment signals.

• Detection of alarm conditions as loss of signal, loss of frame, loss of signaling multi-frame andloss of CRC multi-frame.

• The Network Processor is the heart of the ASAP card and provides the implementation of theprotocols to be supported as well as data forwarding. ATM-IMA over PseudoWire, SAToP (like onthe PDH card), CESoP, ML-PPP can be supported by the SW application controlling the Data Pathand running on a different MIPS processor embedded on the same chip.

• The main function implemented in the confederation FPGA is the clock management.

• The right-hand side is the backplane with the 1 Gb bus shared among the other slots and hencecommon with the other units (PDH units and Modem units).

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 59

Page 220: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 220/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 60

Page 221: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 221/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 61

Page 222: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 222/1149

Page 223: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 223/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 63

Page 224: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 224/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 64

Page 225: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 225/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 65

Page 226: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 226/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 66

Page 227: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 227/1149

Page 228: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 228/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 68

Page 229: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 229/1149

Page 230: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 230/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 70

Page 231: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 231/1149

Page 232: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 232/1149

Page 233: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 233/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Two DC connectors in the front (for box version), or power from the back panel (for plug-inversion).

• Two RJ45 for the data in (DATA)

• Two RJ45 for the data + DC out (DC+DATA)

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 73

Page 234: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 234/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 74

Page 235: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 235/1149

Page 236: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 236/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 76

Page 237: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 237/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 77

Page 238: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 238/1149

Page 239: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 239/1149

Page 240: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 240/1149

Page 241: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 241/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 81

Page 242: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 242/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 82

Page 243: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 243/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 83

Page 244: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 244/1149

Page 245: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 245/1149

Page 246: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 246/1149

Page 247: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 247/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 87

Page 248: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 248/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 88

Page 249: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 249/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 89

Page 250: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 250/1149

Page 251: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 251/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Check front-panel LED indications

INDICATOR STATUS DEFINITION

Link (L) Off Link Down

Green Link Up

 Activity (A) Off No Tx/Rx activity

Blinking Yellow Tx/Rx activity

Major Alarm (M) Red At least one alarm is present on the NE with major severity

Minor Alarm (m) Red At least one alarm is present on the NE with minor severity (not supported)

Warning Alarm (W) Yellow At least one alarm is present on the NE with warning severity (not supported)

 Abnormal Condition (A) Yellow At least one abnormal condition is present on the NE

- Tx Power muted by operator

- ACM frozen by operator

- MPT loopback active

MPT1 Off MPT is not emitting power according with the known configuration

Green MPT is emitting power as expected according the known configuration

 Yellow MPT is not emitting power due to a forced Squelch condition

Red MPT is ABNORMALLY emitting power

MPT2 (not supported)

 At start-up the MSS-1c:

• lights on all the alarm LEDs (Major, Minor, Warning and Abnormal)

• lights on the MPT LED as yellow, then this LED will be green, red, or yellow, as explained above.

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 91

Page 252: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 252/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 92

Page 253: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 253/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 93

Page 254: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 254/1149

Page 255: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 255/1149

Page 256: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 256/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 96

Page 257: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 257/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 97

Page 258: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 258/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 98

Page 259: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 259/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 99

Page 260: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 260/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 100

Page 261: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 261/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 101

Page 262: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 262/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 102

Page 263: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 263/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 1

Page 264: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 264/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.4 2012-07-01 AL University First edition

4.0 2012-09-14 AL University Updated for Release 4.0

Page 265: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 265/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 3

Page 266: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 266/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 4

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 267: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 267/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 5

Page

1 Outdoor Unit 71.1 ODU300 Construction and Mounting 81.2 ODU300 Characteristics 9 2 ODU300 Block Diagram 112.1 ODU300 Block Diagram 12 3 Outdoor Installations 133.1 ODU300 and Antenna 143.2 ODU300 Mounting Options 153.3 Installing the ODU 163.4 Direct-Mounted ODUs 173.5 Remote-Mounted ODUs (solution 1) 183.6 Remote-Mounted ODUs (solution 2) 193.7 Waveguide Flange Data 21

3.8 Grounding the ODU 223.9 ODU300 External Connectors 23

Page 268: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 268/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 6

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 269: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 269/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 7

Page 270: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 270/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The ODUs include a waveguide antenna port, Type-N female connector for the ODU cable, a BNC femaleconnector (with captive protection cap) for RSSI access, and a grounding stud.

• The ODUs, are designed for direct antenna attachment via an 9500MPR-specific mounting collar suppliedwith the antennas.

• ODU polarization is determined by the position of a polarization rotator fitted within the mounting collar.

• A remote ODU mounting kit is available as an option. These may be used to connect an ODU to a standardantenna, or to a dual-polarized antenna for co-channel link operation.

• ODUs are fixed for Tx High or Tx Low operation.

• Where two ODUs are to be connected to a single antenna for hot-standby or frequency diversityconfigurations, a direct-mounting coupler is used. They are available for equal or unequal loss operation.Equal loss is nominally 3 dB.

• Unequal is nominally 1/6 dB.

• The ODU assembly meets the ASTME standard for a 2000 hour salt-spray test, and relevant IEC, UL, andBellcore standards for wind-driven rain.

• ODUs are frequency-band specific, but within each band are capacity-independent up to their designmaximums.

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 8

Page 271: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 271/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 9

Page 272: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 272/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 10

Page 273: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 273/1149

Page 274: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 274/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The quadrature modulated 311 MHz IF signal from the MSS is extracted at the N-Plexer and passed via a cable AGCcircuit to an IQ demodulator/modulator.

• Here the 311 MHz IF is demodulated to derive the separate I and Q signals using the 10 MHz synchronizing referencesignal from the MSS.

• These I and Q signals modulate a Tx IF, which has been set to a specific frequency between 1700 and 2300 MHz, suchthat when mixed with the Tx local oscillator signal (TXLO) in the subsequent mixer stage, it provides the selectedtransmit frequency. Both the IF and Tx local oscillators are synthesizer types.

• Between the IQ modulator and the mixer, a variable attenuator provides software adjustment of Tx power.

• After the mixer, the transmit signal is amplified in the PA (Power Amplifier) and passed via the diplexer to the antennafeed port.

• A microprocessor in the ODU supports configuration of the synthesizers, transmit power, and alarm and performancemonitoring. The ODU microprocessor is managed under the NCC microprocessor, with which it communicates via thetelemetry channel.

• A DC-DC converter provides the required low-voltage DC rails from the -48 Vdc supply.

• In the receive direction, the signal from the diplexer is passed via the LNA (Low Noise Amplifier) to the Rx mixer, whereit is mixed with the receive local oscillator (RXLO) input to provide an IF of between 1700 and 2300 MHz. It is thenamplified in a gain-controlled stage to compensate for fluctuations in receive level, and in the IF mixer, is converted to a126 MHz IF for transport via the ODU cable to the MSS.

• The offset of the transmit frequencies at each end of the link is determined by the required Tx/Rx split. The split optionsprovided are based on ETSI plans for each frequency band. The actual frequency range per band and the allowableTx/Rx splits are range-limited within 9500MPR-E to prevent incorrect user selection.

• A power monitor circuit is included in the common port of the diplexer assembly to provide measurement of transmit

power. It is used to confirm transmit output power for performance monitoring purposes, and to provide a closed-loopfor power level management over the specified ODU temperature and frequency range.

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 12

Page 275: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 275/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 13

Page 276: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 276/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 14

Page 277: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 277/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

The ODU mounts directly to an Antenna: Non-protected.

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 15

Page 278: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 278/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 16

Page 279: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 279/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 17

Page 280: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 280/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• ODUs can be installed separately from its antenna, using a remote-mount to support the ODU, and a flexible-waveguide or coaxial cable to connect the ODU to its antenna:

• a flexible waveguide is required.

• The remote mount allows use of standard, single or dual polarization antennas.

• The mount can also be used to remotely support a protected ODU pairing installed on a coupler. The couplerconnects to the remote mount assembly in the same way as an ODU.

• The remote mount clamps to a standard 112 mm (4”) pole-mount, and is common to all frequency bands.Figure shows an ODU installed on a remote mount.

• Flexible waveguides are frequency band specific and are normally available in two lengths, 600 mm (2 ft) or900 mm (3 ft). Both flange ends are identical, and are grooved for a half-thickness gasket, which is suppliedwith the waveguide, along with flange mounting bolts.

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 18

Page 281: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 281/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 19

Page 282: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 282/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 20

Page 283: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 283/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Table lists the antenna port flange types used with the ODU300, plus their mating flange options andfastening hardware for remote mount installations.

• UDR/PDR flanges are rectangular; UBR/PDR flanges are square.

• On the ODU, the two flange styles are:

• UDR . 6-hole or 8-hole (6/8 bolt holes depending on frequency range/waveguide type), flush-faceflange with threaded, blind holes.

• UBR . 4-hole flush-face flange with threaded, blind holes.

• The corresponding mating flange styles are:• PDR . 6-hole or 8-hole flange with gasket groove and clear holes.

• PBR . 4-hole flange with a gasket groove and clear holes.

•  All fastening hardware is metric.

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 21

Page 284: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 284/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 22

Page 285: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 285/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

For all set-ups, one ground wire must be installed to ground the ODU.

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 23

Page 286: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 286/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 24

Page 287: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 287/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 25

Page 288: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 288/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 26

Page 289: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 289/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 1

Page 290: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 290/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.4 2012-06-14 AL University First edition

4.0 2012-09-14 AL University Updated for release 4.0

Page 291: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 291/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 3

Page 292: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 292/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 4

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 293: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 293/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 5

Page

1 Outdoor Units 71.1 MPT-HC Construction and Mounting 81.2 MPT-HC Characteristics 13 2 MPT-HC Block Diagram 152.1 MPT-HC Block Diagram 16 3 Outdoor Installations 173.1 Installing the MPT-HC 183.2 6-7-8 GHz MPT-HC: integrated antenna (1+0) 193.3 11-38 GHz MPT-HC: integrated antenna (1+0) 203.4 6-7-8 GHz MPT-HC: integrated antenna (1+1) 213.5 11-38 GHz MPT-HC: integrated antenna (1+1) 223.6 6-7-8 GHz MPT-HC: non-integrated antenna (1+0) 233.7 11-38 GHz MPT-HC: non-integrated antenna (1+0) 24

3.8 6-7-8 GHz MPT-HC: non-integrated antenna (1+1) 253.9 11-38 GHz MPT-HC: non-integrated antenna (1+1) 263.10 MPT-HC External Connectors 273.11 DC Extractor 32

Page 294: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 294/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 6

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 295: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 295/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 7

Page 296: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 296/1149

Page 297: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 297/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 9

Page 298: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 298/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

With embedded diplexer for cost optimization and different mechanics from 11-38 GHz (6 GHz), where thebranching (diplexer) is internal to the MPT-HC cabinet; this type of MPT-HC is identified by one Logistical Itemonly;

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 10

Page 299: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 299/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• With external diplexer: due to a vary high number of shifters the diplexer is external for the flexibility of theshifter customization (7 GHz and 8 GHz), where MPT-HC is composed by two independent units:

• the BRANCHING assembly (containing the diplexer)

• the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly (containing the RF section)

• Each of this type of MPT-HC is identified by two Logistical Items, one for the BRANCHING assembly andanother for the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly.

• To read the BRANCHING assembly identification label it is necessary to separate the BRANCHING assemblyfrom the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly.

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 11

Page 300: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 300/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

With embedded diplexer for cost optimization (11 GHz to 38 GHz), where the branching (diplexer) is internalto the MPT-HC cabinet; this type of MPT-HC is identified by one Logistical Item only.

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 12

Page 301: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 301/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 13

Page 302: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 302/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 14

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 303: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 303/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 15

Page 304: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 304/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

•The MPT-HC is broken down into the following sections:• Common Belt section. This section is Frequency independent, and all the features relevant to this unit are

common to all the MPT RF options.

• RF section that is frequency dependent.

• The MPT-HC interface is based on a Gb Ethernet, that can be either optical or electrical depending on theneeds and the cable length. If the optical port has/have to be used (data and/or RPS port), thecorresponding SFP plug-in must be installed by opening the Cobox.

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 16

Page 305: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 305/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 17

Page 306: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 306/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 18

Page 307: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 307/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 19

Page 308: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 308/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 20

Page 309: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 309/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 21

Page 310: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 310/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 22

Page 311: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 311/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 23

Page 312: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 312/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 24

Page 313: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 313/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 25

Page 314: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 314/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 26

Page 315: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 315/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Warning: A waterproofing tape is glued on the waveguide of the MPT-HC. It must never be removed.

FREQUENCY GHz -> 11 13-15 18-25 38

Waveguide type -> WR75 WR62 WR42 WR28

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 27

Ref. infigure

Interface Connector

(1) RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler waveguide

(2) Connector for power supply coax. cable male N 50 ohm

(3) Hole for Ethernet connection (in the co-box) Gland for Cat5e or optical cable

(optional)

(4) Hole for connection to a second MPT-HC in 1+1 (in the

co-box)

ODC

(5) Co-box

Page 316: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 316/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Warning: A waterproofing tape is glued on the waveguide of the MPT-HC. It must never be removed.

FREQUENCY GHz -> 7 8

Waveguide type -> WR112 WR112

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 28

Ref. infigure

Interface Connector

(1) RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler waveguide

(2) Connector for power supply coax. cable male N 50 ohm

(3) Hole for Ethernet connection (in the co-box) Gland for Cat5e or optical cable

(optional)

(4) Hole for connection to a second MPT-HC in 1+1 (in the

co-box)

ODC

(5) Co-box

Page 317: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 317/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Warning: A waterproofing tape is glued on the waveguide of the MPT-HC. It must never be removed.

FREQUENCY GHz -> 6

Waveguide type -> WR137

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 29

Ref. infigure

Interface Connector

(1) RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler waveguide

(2) Connector for power supply coax. cable male N 50 ohm

(3) Hole for Ethernet connection (in the co-box) Gland for Cat5e or optical cable

(optional)

(4) Hole for connection to a second MPT-HC in 1+1 (in the

co-box)

ODC

(5) Co-box

Page 318: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 318/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 30

Page 319: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 319/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Optional cable (P/N 3CC52191AA**).

• Connector usage:

• (M1) LEMO connector, to be plugged into LEMO connector on MPT-HC V2/MPT-MC.

• Note: LEMO is the cable manufacturer

• (M2) RJ45 connector, to connect the MCT directly to the MPT.

• Banana plugs (M3) and (M4): output is a 0 to +5V DC voltage proportional to the radio Rx field. Duringequipment line –up, through a multi –meter it is possible to easily point the antenna until the measuredvoltage is the maximum, corresponding to the maximum radio Rx field.

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 31

Page 320: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 320/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The DC Extractor, installed close to the MPT-HC, allows to interconnect the MSS and the MPT-HC with asingle electrical Ethernet cable by using the “Power Feed over Ethernet” solution (Ethernet traffic and PowerSupply on the same cable).

The DC Extractor then separates the Power Supply from the Ethernet traffic, which are separately sent to theMPT-HC.

The two cables, interconnecting the DC Extractor to the MPT-HC (the Power Supply cable to be connected tothe DC Out connector of the DC Extractor and Ethernet cable to be connected to the Data Out connector of the DC Extractor), are provided, already terminated (2 m long), with the DC Extractor itself 

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 32

Page 321: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 321/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 33

Page 322: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 322/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 34

Page 323: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 323/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page intentionally left blank 

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 35

Page 324: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 324/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 3 · Page 36

Page 325: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 325/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 1

Page 326: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 326/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.4 2012-06-14 AL University First edition

4.0 2012-09-14 AL University Updated for release 4.0

Page 327: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 327/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 3

Page 328: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 328/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 4

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 329: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 329/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 5

Page

1 Outdoor Units 71.1 MPT-HCV2 Characteristics 81.2 MPT-XP Characteristics 101.3 MPT-HC V2/MPT-XP XPIC 11 2 MPT-HC V2/MPT-XP/9558HC block diagram 132.1 MPT-HC V2/MPT-XP block diagram 142.2 MPT-HC V2/MPT-XP RF section block diagram 15 3 Outdoor Installations 173.1 Installing the MPT-HC V2/MPT-XP 183.2 MPT-HCV2 External Connectors 19

Page 330: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 330/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 6

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 331: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 331/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 7

Page 332: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 332/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Two mechanical solutions are adopted:

• With embedded diplexer for cost optimization, where the branching (diplexer) is internal to the MPT-HC V2 cabinet; this type of unit is identified by one Logistical Item only.

• With external diplexer: due to a high number of shifters the diplexer is external for the flexibility of theshifter customization, where MPT-HC V2 is composed by two independent units: the BRANCHINGassembly (containing the diplexer) and the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly (containing the RF section);each of this type of MPT-HC V2 is identified by two Logistical Items, one for the BRANCHING assemblyand another for the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly. To read the BRANCHING assembly identification label it

is necessary to separate the BRANCHING assembly from the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly.

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 8

Page 333: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 333/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 9

Page 334: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 334/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 10

Page 335: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 335/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 11

Page 336: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 336/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 12

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 337: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 337/1149

Page 338: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 338/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The common belt section is frequency-independent. It is the digital section of the MPT-HC V2/MPT-XP.

• There are two architecture types for the RF section, the differences between these twoarchitectures are on the Rx side:

• For 7/8 GHz, there are two frequency conversions between RF input frequency and basebandfrequency

• For all other bands, there are three frequency conversions

• The power comes from office power. Input voltage range is -28 to -58 Vdc.

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 14

Page 339: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 339/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 15

Page 340: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 340/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 16

Page 341: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 341/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 17

Page 342: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 342/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 18

Page 343: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 343/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Note: RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler. Remove the plastic cover.

Warning: A waterproofing tape is glued on the waveguide of the MPT-HCV2. It must never be removed.

FREQUENCY GHz -> 6 11 13-15 18-25 38

Waveguide type -> WR137 WR75 WR62 WR42 WR28

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 19

Page 344: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 344/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler. Remove the plastic cover.

Warning: A waterproofing tape is glued on the waveguide of the MPT-HC V2. It must never be removed.

FREQUENCY GHz -> 7 8

Waveguide type -> WR112 WR112

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 20

Page 345: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 345/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 21

Page 346: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 346/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Optional cable (P/N 3CC52191AA**).

• Connector usage:

• (M1) LEMO connector, to be plugged into LEMO connector on MPT-HC V2/MPT-MC.

• Note: LEMO is the cable manufacturer

• (M2) RJ45 connector, to connect the MCT directly to the MPT.

• Banana plugs (M3) and (M4): output is a 0 to +5V DC voltage proportional to the radio Rx field.During equipment line-up, through a multi –meter it is possible to easily point the antenna until themeasured voltage is the maximum, corresponding to the maximum radio Rx field.

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 22

Page 347: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 347/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 23

Page 348: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 348/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 24

Page 349: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 349/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page intentionally left blank 

Section 2 · Module 4 · Page 25

Page 350: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 350/1149

Page 351: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 351/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 1

Page 352: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 352/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.4 2012-06-14 AL University First edition

4.0 2012-09-14 AL University Updated for Release 4.0

Page 353: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 353/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 3

Page 354: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 354/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 4

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 355: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 355/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 5

Page

1 Outdoor Units 71.1 MPT-MC Construction and Mounting 81.2 MPT-MC Characteristics 10 2 MPT-MC Block Diagram 132.1 MPT-MC Block Diagram 14 3 Outdoor Installations 153.1 Installing the MPT-MC 163.2 7-8 GHz MPT-MC: integrated antenna (1+0) 173.3 6 and 11-38 GHz MPT-MC: integrated antenna (1+0) 183.4 7-8 GHz MPT-MC: integrated antenna (1+1) 193.5 6 and 11-38 GHz MPT-MC: integrated antenna (1+1) 203.6 MPT-MC: non-integrated antenna (1+0) 213.7 7-8 GHz MPT-MC: non-integrated antenna (1+1) 22

3.8 6 and 11-38 GHz MPT-MC: non-integrated antenna (1+1) 233.9 MPT-MC External Connectors 24

Page 356: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 356/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 6

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 357: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 357/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 7

Page 358: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 358/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 8

Page 359: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 359/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• With embedded diplexer for cost optimization (6 GHz and from 11 GHz to 38 GHz), where the branching(diplexer) is internal to the MPT-MC cabinet; this type of MPT-MC is identified by one Logistical Item only.

• With external diplexer: due to a vary high number of shifters the diplexer is external for the flexibility of theshifter customization (7 GHz and 8 GHz), where MPT-MC is composed by two independent units:

• the BRANCHING assembly (containing the diplexer) and

• the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly (containing the RF section);

• Each of this type of MPT-MC is identified by two Logistical Items, one for the BRANCHING assembly andanother for the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly.

• To read the BRANCHING assembly identification label it is necessary to separate the BRANCHING assemblyfrom the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly.

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 9

Page 360: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 360/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

•Static radio profiles:

• bandwidths: 3.5, 7, 14, 28, 40, and 56 MHz

• modulations: 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, and 256 QAM

•  Adaptive radio profiles:

• bandwidths: 3.5, 7, 14, 28, 40, and 56 MHz

• modulations: 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, and 256 QAM 

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 10

Page 361: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 361/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 11

Page 362: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 362/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 12

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 363: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 363/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 13

Page 364: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 364/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

•The MPT-MC breaks down into the following sections:• Common Belt section. This section is Frequency independent, and all the features relevant to this unit are

common to all the MPT RF options.

• RF section that is frequency dependent.

• The MPT-MC is similar to MPT-HC from architecture standpoint. It has limited capacity vs. MPT-HC and isnatively Ethernet powered (no Power extractor required).

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 14

Page 365: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 365/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 15

Page 366: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 366/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 16

Page 367: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 367/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 17

Page 368: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 368/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 18

Page 369: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 369/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 19

Page 370: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 370/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 20

Page 371: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 371/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 21

Page 372: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 372/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 22

Page 373: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 373/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 23

Page 374: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 374/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• WARNING: A waterproofing tape is glued on the waveguide of the MPT-MC. It must never be removed.

• With embedded diplexer for cost optimization (6 GHz and from 11 GHz to 38 GHz), where the branching(diplexer) is internal to the MPT-MC cabinet; this type of MPT-MC is identified by one Logistical Item only.

FREQUENCY GHz -> 6 11 13-15 18-25 38

Waveguide type -> WR137 WR75 WR62 WR42 WR28

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 24

Page 375: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 375/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• WARNING: A waterproofing tape is glued on the waveguide of the MPT-MC. It must never be removed.

• With external diplexer: due to a vary high number of shifters the diplexer is external for the flexibility of theshifter customization (7 GHz and 8 GHz), where MPT-MC is composed by two independent units:

• the BRANCHING assembly (containing the diplexer)

• the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly (containing the RF section);

• Each of this type of MPT-MC is identified by two Logistical Items, one for the BRANCHING assembly andanother for the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly.

• To read the BRANCHING assembly identification label it is necessary to separate the BRANCHING assemblyfrom the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly.

FREQUENCY GHz -> 7 8

Waveguide type -> WR112 WR112

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 25

Page 376: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 376/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 26

Page 377: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 377/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Optional cable (P/N 3CC52191AA**).

• Connector usage: 

• (M1) LEMO connector, to be plugged into LEMO connector on MPT-HC V2/MPT-MC.

• Note: LEMO is the cable manufacturer

• (M2) RJ45 connector, to connect the MCT directly to the MPT.

• Banana plugs (M3) and (M4): output is a 0 to +5V DC voltage proportional to the radio Rx field. Duringequipment line-up, through a multi –meter it is possible to easily point the antenna until the measuredvoltage is the maximum, corresponding to the maximum radio Rx field.

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 27

Page 378: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 378/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 28

Page 379: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 379/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 29

Page 380: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 380/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 2 · Module 5 · Page 30

Page 381: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 381/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 1

Page 382: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 382/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.4 2012-07-01 AL University First edition

4.0 2012-09-14 AL University Updated for Release 4.0

Page 383: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 383/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 3

Page 384: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 384/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 4

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 385: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 385/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 5

Page

1 WebEML start 91.1 WebEML start 10 2 WebEML Main View 192.1 WebEML Main view 202.2 Main Tool Bar Area 222.3 Severity Alarm Panel 242.4 Domain Alarm Synthesis Area 252.5 Alarm & State Panels 262.6 Resource Tree Area - Selection Criteria 27 3 Configuration Menu 293.1 Configuration Menu 303.2 NE Time Menu 313.3 Network Configuration Menu 32

3.3.1 NTP Configuration 343.3.2 IP Configuration - IP Static Routing Configuration 353.3.3 IP Configuration - OSPF Area Configuration 363.3.4 Routing Information 373.4 Alarm Severities 383.5 System Settings 413.6 Cross Connections 423.7 Ring Configuration 463.8 LAG Configuration 473.9 QoS Configuration 483.10 AUX Cross Connections 523.11 XPIC Configuration Menu 553.12 VLAN Configuration 56

3.13 VLAN Configuration - 802.1D 573.14 VLAN Configuration - 802.1Q 583.15 Traffic Descriptors 603.16 Profiles Management 623.17 Ethernet Features Shell 70 4 Diagnosis Menu 734.1 Diagnosis Menu 744.2 Alarms 754.3 Log Browsing 874.4 Remote Inventory 924.5 Abnormal Condition List 934.6 Summary Block Diagram View 944.7 Current Configuration View 97 

5 Supervision Menu 995.1 Supervision Menu 1005.2 Access State 1015.3 Restart NE 1035.4 Restart MPT 1045.5 MIB Management 1055.6 SW License 109 6 SW Download Menu 1116.1 SW Download Menu 112 7 Equipment Tab 1137.1 Equipment Tab panel 1147.2 Starting From Scratch 1177.3 Tab panels in the Resource Detail Area 118 

8 Protection Schemes Tab 1338.1 Description 134 9 Synchronization Tab 137

Page 386: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 386/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 6

Page

9.1 Synchronization Window 1389.2 Synchronization Window 1399.3 Synchronization sources assignment rules 1419.4 Allowed synchronization sources assignment 1429.5 SSM Summary Table 143 10 Connections Tab 14510.1 Connections Menu 146 11 Browser Interface 14711.1 Browser Interface 14811.2 Browser Interface - Logon 14911.3 Browser Interface - Alarm Screen 15011.4 Browser Interface - Date & Time Setting 15111.5 Browser Interface - Date & Time NTP Enabled 152

11.6 Browser Interface - Configuration Info 15311.7 Browser Interface - DHCP 15511.8 Browser Interface - License Info 15611.9 Community Strings Setting 15711.10 Browser Interface - Logout 158

Page 387: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 387/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 7

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 388: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 388/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 8

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 389: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 389/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 9

Page 390: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 390/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 10

Page 391: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 391/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 11

Notes:

• The Main Screen is the starting point of the craft terminal application.

• Only one NE can be managed in a NEtO session.

• When you are connected to an NE, you get an Alarm overview.

Page 392: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 392/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 12

Notes:

Community Strings

The Community String (CS) acts like a password to control access to an NE. It defines what communityof people can access the NE.

Site Database

•  You can manage and organize a list of available NEs in a table on a server or a local PC.

•  All data related to all NEs added to the list is saved in a custom format called “.NETO”.

•  You can have your own NEs lists repository, containing all .NETO files that you produced with NEs

information inside.

• There is no default location for the database. You can save these anywhere, but be sure youremember where you put it.

Page 393: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 393/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 13

Notes:

Icon in System Tray (highest alarm level in NE)

• Gray: Supervision is not active

• Red: Highest alarm is Critical

• Orange: Highest alarm is Major

•  Yellow: Highest alarm is Minor

• Cyan: Highest alarm is Warning

• Blue: Highest alarm is Indeterminate

• Green: No Active Alarms

Page 394: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 394/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 14

Notes:• The 9500 MPR-A/E supports access from SNMP managers implementing both SNMPv2/v1 andSNMPv3

protocols. The supported SNMP operating modes are the following:

• SNMPv2: This is the default mode. Only SNMPv2/v1 managers are allowed access to the NEfor both reading and writing.

• SNMPv3: Only SNMPv3 managers are allowed access to the NE.

• SNMPv3 addresses security problems by adding two new features on top of the existing SNMPv1 andSNMPv2 network management protocols:

• Authentication using hashing and time stamps. • Confidentiality using encryption. 

Page 395: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 395/1149

Page 396: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 396/1149

Page 397: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 397/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 17

Notes:

Login

• Type your username - must not be more than 20 characters.

• Type your password - must not be less than eight (8) or more than 20 characters and must becomposed of ASCII characters set (UPPER/lower case, numeric and special characters).

).

Page 398: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 398/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 18

Page 399: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 399/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 19

Page 400: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 400/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 20

Page 401: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 401/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 21

Page 402: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 402/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 22

Page 403: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 403/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 23

Page 404: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 404/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The WebEML provides an alarm functionality that informs the operator on the severity of thedifferent alarms in the NE as well as on the number of current alarms.

• There are five alarm severity levels.

• Each alarm severity is represented by an alarm icon situated in the top left hand corner of theview.

• The shape of the alarm icons in the alarm panel gives an indication of the occurrence of alarms.

 An alarm icon with a circle inside it (and a number at the bottom of the icon) indicates thatalarms of the number and the type defined by the icon are occurring.

•  An alarm icon with a rectangle inside it indicates that no alarms of the type defined by the iconare occurring.

•  An alarm icon grayed out indicates that spontaneous incoming alarm notification have beeninhibited.

• In the WebEML these different levels are associated with colors:

• Red: Critical alarm (CRI).

• Orange: Major alarm (MAJ).

•  Yellow: Minor alarm (MIN).• Cyan: Warning alarm (WNG).

• Blue: Indeterminate (IND).

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 24

Page 405: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 405/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 25

Notes:

 Alarm Functionality

• The Craft Terminal provides an alarm functionality that informs the operator on the severity of thedifferent alarms in the NE as well as on the number of current alarms.

• There are five different alarm severity levels. These different levels are associated with colors (greenin normal condition).

• Red: Critical alarm (C)

• Orange: Major alarm (M)

•  Yellow: Minor alarm (m)• Cyan: Warning alarm (W)

• White: Indeterminate (I) Not operative

• The shape of the alarm icons in the alarm panel gives an indication of alarm occurrence.

•  An alarm icon with a rectangle inside indicates that no alarms of the type defined by the icon areoccurring.

•  An alarm icon with a circle inside it (and a number at the bottom of the icon) indicates that alarms of the number and the type defined by the icon are occurring.

•  An alarm icon grayed out indicates that a spontaneous incoming alarm notification has been inhibited.

Page 406: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 406/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 26

Notes:

Status Control Area

• LOCK : Local Access state: indicates whether the NE is managed by a craft terminal or by the OS.

• Green: Indicates that the terminal has the OS permission to manage the NE (granted).

• Cyan: Indicates that the terminal does not have the OS permission to manage the NE (denied).

• COM: Operational state: indicates whether or not the communication with the OS is established.

• Green: SDH service link up

• Red: SDH service link down

• SUP: Supervision state: indicates whether or not the NE is under OS supervision.

• Green: NE is under supervision.

• Orange: NE is not under supervision.• OS: OS isolation.

• Green: NE is not managed by the 1353SH.

• Cyan: NE is managed by the 1353SH.

• NTP: Server Status

• Orange: NTP function is disabled.

• Green: Loss of communication with Main and Standby servers.

• Cyan: NE is communicating with NTP Main or Standby servers.

•  AC: Indicates whether some abnormal conditions have been recognized. The operator can visualize them with theDiagnosis-> Abnormal condition list menu.

• Green: Normal operating condition

• Cyan: Detection of an Abnormal operative condition

Page 407: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 407/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Each tree node consists of possibly three symbols and a label.

• The first optional symbol indicates structure state: if symbol is "+", there can be expanded

• showing its contained lower levels. Tree structure can be collapsed if symbol is "-". With nosymbol, node represents a tree leaf.

• Second symbol is the graphical representation of resource itself.

• Third symbol is a round-shape icon showing the alarm status of component.

• The operator can select resource by clicking with mouse to perform the action dependent on click type. Resource Detail Area related to the selected item is displayed.

• Each resource listed above may be selected by using the mouse by a Single or Double left click: 

• Single left click: - the resource is highlighted. This selection causes the activation of theresource list area, e.g., every time the operator selects a resource in the resource tree areathe corresponding data are displayed in the “Resource list area”. 

• Double left click: expands tree structure, so activating the display/update of resource list.

 As soon as a node is expanded, another double click on such node would collapse treestructure to its closed view.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 27

Page 408: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 408/1149

Page 409: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 409/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 29

Page 410: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 410/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The Configuration Menu is divided into:

• NE Time

• Network Configuration

• Alarm Severities

• System Settings

• Cross Connections

• Ring Configuration

• LAG Configuration

• QoS Configuration

• AUX Cross Connections

• XPIC Configuration

• VLAN Configuration

• Traffic Description

• Profiles Management

• Ethernet Features Shell

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 30

Page 411: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 411/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The NTP Status field is a read-only field, which shows the configuration regarding the NTP(Network Time Protocol), if the protocol has been enabled and configured in MenuConfiguration → Network Configuration → NTP Configuration.

• The NTP Status field shows:

• status of NTP (enabled/disabled);

• IP address of the Main Server, which distributes the time to all the NEs in the network;

• IP address of the Spare Server (IP address of a second NTP Server), which replaces the MainServer in case of failure.

• The NE local time can be displayed and/or re-aligned to the OS time basis.

• From the Configuration pull down menu, select the NE Time option.

• The dialogue box opens, from which the local NE can be set.

• The NE Time dialogue box displays the current NE time and the current OS time.

• To re-align the NE time to the OS time, click on the Set NE Time With OS Time check box andclick the Apply button to validate.

• The Refresh button causes the refresh of the screen.

Note: If a change of Change Time Zone on the PC is applied with the JUSM opened, in order tomake it updated on WebEML Close/Open the JUSM application and Read Time another time.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 31

Page 412: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 412/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The Network Configuration menu supports the the following operations:

• Local Configuration:

• defines the local virtual NE address

• NTP Configuration

• defines the Network Time Protocol

• Ethernet Configuration

• not implemented

• IP Configuration which comprises:

• IP static routing configuration: defines Host/Network destination address for IP static

routing• OSPF Area configuration: defines the Open Shortest Path First address

• IP Point-To-Point Configuration: defines the IP address of the interfaces which use thePPP protocol (not implemented)

• Routing information:

• shows a summary of the information relevant to the routing which has been configured.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 32

Page 413: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 413/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Select the Network Configuration option and then, from the cascading menu, the LocalConfiguration option.

• The dialogue box opens, which allows to configure the local IP address of the NE. This local IPaddress is the IP address associated to a virtual interface and to the other interfaces which usethe PPP protocol (the TMN-RF channels).

•  Apply button - used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialogue boxand closes it; the dialogue is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.

• Close button - closes the dialogue.

• Help button - provides some useful information on the dialogue.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 33

Page 414: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 414/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Put a check mark in the NTP protocol field to enable the protocol.

• Enter the IP address in the Main Server address field for the server, that distributes the time toall the NEs in the network. In the Spare Server address field, enter the IP address of the SpareServer.

• The Server reachability field is a read-only field, which shows the reachability of the NTPservers. The following information can appear:

• "Main server reachable"

• "Spare server reachable"

• "None servers reachable"

• "Both servers reachable"

• Click Refresh to update the screen.

• Click  Apply to send to the NE the NTP Configuration.

• Click Close to close the NTP Configuration window.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 34

Page 415: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 415/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The following fields and data are present:

• IP Address: IP address necessary to reach a specific host/network 

• IP Mask: IP Mask to reach a network 

• Default Gateway IP Address: address of the next hop gateway

• Interface type: point to point interfaces made available by the NE.

Host or Network Address:

• For Host, click the Host button and enter the IP address in the IP Address field

• Network, click the Network button and enter the IP Mask of the radio in the IP Mask field

Gateway or Point to Point I/F Choice:

• For default gateway, click the Gateway IP Address, button  enter the default gateway IPaddress in the Gateway IP Address field.

• For point to point, click the Point to Point Interface Index button and select Gateway from the Interface Type dropdown menu.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 35

Page 416: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 416/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The following fields and data are present:

• OSPF Area IP Address

• OSPF Area Stub

• The fields give system information that includes all the addresses (specific to a NE and to aNetwork) in an Area.

•  Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the completeRAP table and close the view; the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursoris displayed.

• New button is used to insert a new page.

• Delete button is used to delete the selected page.

• Close button closes the dialogue without changing of the data.

WARNING: When the area is a Stub area, all the interfaces (NMS and Ethernet) must be defined “Stub". 

• To configure a new area tick the "new" check box to ungray the IP address stub area. Enter the

OSPF Area Address and the OSPF Area Stub Flag (True/False) and press "Create" button toapply and add the area to the table.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 36

Page 417: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 417/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The Refresh button allows to refresh the information shown in the screen.

• The Close button closes the dialogue without changing of the data.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 37

Page 418: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 418/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The Profile Name field the four alarm severity profiles are listed:

• Profile "No Alarms". With this profile all alarms are disabled.

• Profile "All Alarms". This profile enables the emission of all the alarms.

• Profile "Radio Tx Alarms". This profile enables the emission of the Tx alarms of the radiolink.

• Profile "Radio Rx Alarms". This profile enables the emission of the Rx alarms of the radiolink.

•  An Alarm Profile is the complete set of the equipment alarms with their severity in case of Service Affecting situation and No Service Affecting situation.

• Each alarm has its Service Affecting and No Service Affecting attribute, which can differ accordingto the Alarm Severity Profile.

• This screen is a read-only screen. It is only possible to select one Profile Name and display therelevant alarms.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 38

Page 419: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 419/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

1. Select the object to which an Alarm Profile has to be associated.

2. Click on the icon.

The Alarm Severity Profile screen displays.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 39

Page 420: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 420/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

3. Select the Alarm Profile to be associated.

4. Put a check mark on the"Show details" box.

5. The list of the alarms with the relevant severity displays.

6. Click  Apply to associate the Alarm Profile.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 40

Page 421: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 421/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The System Settings window supports system configuration, providing the setting of someparameters for the NE setup. The NE configuration tab-panel has 9 fields:

• Tributary Port Configuration - set the suitable impedance of the E1 stream (Unbalanced 75ohms/Balanced 120 ohm).

• DHCP - configures automatically IP address, IP mask and default gateway of the PC Ethernetinterface used to reach the NE.

•  Admission Control for Adaptive Modulation (ODU300 only) – the Admission Control forTDM flows (cross-connected to radio direction working in Adaptive Modulation). Default: “Enabled”. 

• Ethernet LOS Criteria - By enabling this feature the following additional criteria are added to

the Core protection switching criteria.• Static Lag Criteria - the Ethernet ports of the Core-E unit in stand-by are in ON state

(enabled) like the ports of the Active Core-E unit, but the Ethernet traffic is not forwarded. 

• System Priority Parameter - required to provision the System Priority (2 bytes) associated tothe NE. This parameter, plus the System ID (NE MAC address), determines the System Aggregation Priority ([0 - 1 bytes] System Priority [2 - 7 bytes] NE MAC address)

• Event and Alarm Log – Enables (default) event and alarm logging. When disabled, the eventsare not sent to the Event Log Browser application 

• NE MAC Address - This field is a read-only field, which shows the MAC address of the NE. ThisMAC address must be used in the cross-connection with TDM2Eth profile.

• SNMP Mode – This field indicates which protocol is allowed for SNMP managers accessing theNE: SNMPv2 or SNMPv3. Default is SNMPv2.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 41

Page 422: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 422/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The Main view is a graphical representation of Cross-connectable slots. Slots and Ethernet ports(represented by “connectors”) are arranged according to the equipment configuration: 

• The CORE module is on the left side of the screen.

• The even numbered slots of rows 2 to 4 are on the top of the screen.

• The odd numbered slots of rows 2 to 4 are on the bottom of the screen.

• Protection groups are represented by dashed lines

• When two units are protected, the 2 protected slots are linked by a dashed line, (e.g.: Slot#5RADIO is protected with Slot#6 RADIO).

• LAG and Ring icons are displayed on the right side of the screen with identifying numbers.

LAG and Ring icons• Different icons are used to identify Radio LAG or Ethernet LAG.

• Ethernet ports involved in an Ethernet LAG are only present in the LAG area (not in theCORE-E area).

• In the figure LAG #4 is a Radio LAG, LAG #1 is an Ethernet LAG.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 42

Page 423: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 423/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The connectors representing the MSS slots are start- and end-point for actual cross-connections. Byusing the mouse drag-and-drop operations the operator can create cross-connections through thesepoints.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 43

Page 424: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 424/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The connectors have different colors depending on the associated slot’s state: 

•White: a connector able to accept a cross-connection and has no active cross-connection yet;

• Green: a connector able to accept a cross-connection and already has one active cross-connection at least;

• Blue: a connector not able to accept a cross-connection.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 44

Page 425: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 425/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• This area contains a panel and various components representing NE cross-connectable slots (orconnectors).

• The operator can directly edit with the mouse this graphical area to visually create and modifycross-connections between available connectors.

• The figure shows an example of ongoing cross-connections configuration.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 45

Page 426: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 426/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The Ring Configuration window consists of the following panels:

• Ring Topologies

• ERP Instances

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 46

Page 427: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 427/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The LAG Configuration window consists of the following panels:

• Configured LAGs – Contains status and ID nformation about all currently created LAGs

• LAG Settings:

• LAG information

• Displays information about a LAG selected in the LAG Configuration window.

• Contains changeable fields for Name, Size, Timeout , and Hash

•  Allows the selected LAG to be enabled.

• PPP RF – allows enabling of PPP routing information (displays only for L1/L2 radio LAGS)

• Available Ports: displays port information (Slot, Port User Label) about ports that can be

added to the LAG.

• Added Ports – Lists ports that are added from the Available Ports panel.

• LAG Creation window

• ID drop-down menu - select lag ID number (1-14).

•Name - Enter the LAG name, optional (up to 32 characters max.).

•Type drop-down menu - select (L1 Radio, L2 Radio, or L2 Ethernet).

•Size drop-down menu - select LAG size (for L1 Radio (1-4), for L2 Ethernet/Radio (1-8))

•Key drop-down menu - If Type is L2 Ethernet/Radio, then select Admin Key value (1-32).

• LACP drop-down menu - L2 Ethernet, select LACP support ( Active, Passive, or Disabled).

•Timeout - timeout period (Short or Long). 

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 47

Page 428: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 428/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The QoS Configuration menu has 3 tab-panels:

• Scheduler Configuration

• Queue Size Configuration

• QoS Classification

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 48

Page 429: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 429/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

In the figure the default configuration is shown.

• Mode field – contains a drop-down menu that contains the following queue scheduling algorithmselections:

• SP – Strict Priority

• DWRR  – Deficit Weighted Round Robin

• Weight field – priority weight (1-32)

• Restore button – return to the previous configuration.

• Defaults button – return to the default settings.

•  Apply button – applies changes to the NE

• Refresh button – resets unapplied changes

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 49

Page 430: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 430/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Each queue can have an assigned buffer size (in bytes) for each radio direction. For example, Q4for radio direction #7.1 has a buffer size of 100000 bytes with a maximum delay of 8 msec.

• Note: If you float the cursor over field, the current and default values of the queue size withrelevant conversion in msec are displayed.

• Copy and Paste buttons - Copy and Paste the parameters of one Radio direction can be copiedto another Radio direction.

• Restore button  – return to the previous configuration

• Defaults button - return to the default settings. Note: The Default button only shows thedefault values. Press the Apply button to confirm the default values.

•  Apply button – apply changes to the NE.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 50

Page 431: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 431/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The classification can be done according to:

• IEEE 802.1p

• DiffServ

• Select the suitable classification in the QoS Classification Criterion field and press Apply.Then click  Yes.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 51

Page 432: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 432/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Two types of AUX Cross-Connections can be implemented:

• Local User Service Channel Cross-Connection

• Service Channels Cross-connection in pass-through

Local user service channel cross-connection

The two local 64 kbit/s service channels on the AUX peripherial can be cross-connected to anODU300 radio link, with one of the three radio service channels (service channel to MPT is notsupported in this release).

Service channels cross-connection in pass-throughIt is possible to cross-connect each individual radio service channel with a radio service channel of another radio direction, without any local termination.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 52

Page 433: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 433/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

1. Select the first termination point in the New Cross-Connection area (this can be a localservice channel or a service channel in a radio link).

Note: the local service channel must be first enabled in the AUX unitsetting menu.

2. Select the second Termination Point as shown in the example in the figure.

Note: the cross-connections are bi-directional.

3. Click on Add. The new cross-connection will appear in the list (upper part of the screen asshown in the figure).

Note: The Apply button is not operational in this release. 

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 53

Page 434: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 434/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

1. Select the Cross-Connection to be deleted (see the figure). 

2. Click Delete. The selected cross-connection is removed from the window. 

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 54

Page 435: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 435/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The 1+1 XPIC Configuration consists of two groups of 1+ HSB with different polarization.

• The XPIC Configuration menu opens by clicking on the relevant button on the Tool bar.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 55

Page 436: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 436/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 56

Page 437: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 437/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• When the NE is configured in this mode (default configuration), the Ethernet traffic is switchedaccording to the destination MAC address without looking the VLAN.

• The packets from the user Ethernet ports having the VLAN ID out the allowed range (0 and 2-4080) are dropped. The packets having a VLAN ID already used for a TDM flow are accepted.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 57

Page 438: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 438/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• New - create a new VLAN (refer to VLAN table management)

• Edit - change the parameters of a VLAN (VLAN name, VLAN member ports, VLAN untagged portsin egress).

• Delete: delete a VLAN-ID. It is possible to remove a VLAN-ID from the VLAN-ID table even if this VLAN-ID has been already configured on one or more user ports as Port VLAN to be added iningress to untagged frames.

• Export - export the VLAN configuration in a file with extension CSV. The file can be stored in thePC to be read later.

• Filter  – display a filter by inserting a name in the "Filter by Name" box and clicking on Filter.

• Clear Filter - by clicking this button all the VLAN created in VLAN table will again appear.

• Refresh - the VLAN table is updated.

• When the NE is configured in this mode, the management of Ethernet traffic looking the VLAN isenabled.

• In this mode, one VLAN will be assigned to all Ethernet frames inside the MPR network.

WARNING: The VLAN ID values configurable must be in the range 2 - 4080. The VLAN IDsalready defined to cross-connect internal flows (i.e. TDM2TDM, TDM2ETH) cannot be used. Themanagement system prohibits the definition of VLAN ID already used. The VLAN ID must bedifferent also from the Flow Id associated to E1 tributaries not yet cross connected.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 58

Page 439: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 439/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• If a Radio LAG or an Ethernet LAG has been created, they will appear in the VLAN management,as shown in the figure.

 VLAN 1 Management

•  VLAN-ID 1 is automatically defined by the NE when the 802.1Q bridge type is selected.

•  VLAN-ID 1 is shown to the operator, but it cannot be neither changed nor deleted.

•  All the user Ethernet ports (enabled and disabled) and all the radio ports are members of the VLAN 1.

• In egress VLAN-ID 1 is always removed from all the ports.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 59

Page 440: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 440/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Create or delete the traffic descriptors, that will be associated to the ATM traffic at the ingressand/or at the egress.

• To create a Traffic Descriptor:

1. Select the domain: ATM (if in the NE the ASAP unit is present) or PWE3 (in the repeaternodes or in the nodes, where an Ethernet termination is present)

2. Insert a label to identify the Traffic Descriptor

3. Configure the following parameters:

z Service Category: CBR, UBR+ or UBR (rtVBR and nrtVBR are not managed)

z Conformance Definition: CBR.1 (VBR.1, VBR.2, VBR.3 are not managed)

4. Configure the following TD Parameters: PCR, CDVT, MDCR 

5. Enable or disable the Policing. For each VP/VC it is possible to enable/disable a cell-based ATM Policing, based on the related ingress ATM Traffic Descriptor. The default configurationof ATM Policing is according to configured Service Category:

z enabled for VP/VC having Service Category CBR;

z disabled for VP/VC having Service Category UBR+ and UBR.

6. Click on Create

7. The already created Traffic Descriptor will appear in the List Traffic Descriptors area.

• To delete a Traffic Descriptor:

1. Select in the List Traffic Descriptors area the Traffic Descriptor to be deleted and click onDelete.

Note: The maximum number of ATM Traffic Descriptors configurable on a NE is given by 2 times the maxnumber of configurable VPs multiplied by max number of ASAP Cards that can be hosted: 2 (2 trafficDescriptors per circuit) x 128 (128 circuits max.) x 6 (6 ASAP units in the NE max.).

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 60

Page 441: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 441/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

z UBR+ Service Category is defined as an UBR Service Category with Traffic DescriptorParameter 3 (MDCR) > 0

z  ATM Traffic Descriptor Parameters for VP/VC rates (PCR,SCR) are defined in terms of cell/second, for CDVT the unit is microseconds, for MBS the unit is cells

z Range for ATM Traffic Descriptor Parameters with VP/VC rates is 0 to the bandwidth of relatedphysical or logical ATM interface, range for CDVT is 0 to 40000 microseconds, range for MBS is0 to 1000 cells.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 61

Page 442: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 442/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The default Operator Name is “initial”. 

• The default Password is “adminadmin”. 

•  According to the operator authentication (correct couple username/password) managed by theNE, the operator will be authorized or not to continue. If the login parameters are not correct, anerror message will be displayed, while the Login window is still open for a new attempt. After 3consecutive failed attempts the login procedure is closed and JUSM does not start.

• On the contrary if the user name and password are correct, JUSM will be started and the operatorwill be allowed to perform the actions according to the right related to his profile.

WARNING: The NE rejects usernames and passwords that do not meet the following rules:

• Password length: the length must be not less than eight (8) characters. Moreover thepassword length must be not longer than 20 characters.

• The existing passwords less than eight characters (e.g., 6 or 7 characters), created witholder software versions, are accepted and maintained.

• Password composition: the password can include full ASCII characters set (UPPER/lowercase, numeric and special characters).

• Username length: the length must be not longer than 20 characters.

• By clicking on the Cancel button, the login procedure is stopped and the JUSM does not start.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 62

Page 443: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 443/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

These items will be enabled according to the right of user profile recognized at login.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 63

Page 444: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 444/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Create button – opens the Create User window to enter information for a new user.

• Change PW button – opens the Changing Password window to change a user’s initial password. 

• Cancel button – closes the Profiles Management window.

• Help button – displays the help browser with context sensitive help information.

• By clicking on Users Management the window displayed in the Figure appears.

• The operator can perform the following actions:

zCreate a new User by clicking on the Create button.

z After the selection of a user in the table, the operator can perform the following actions:

Delete an existing User (the Initial and Craftsperson Users cannot be deleted) by clickingon the Delete button.

Change PW (by Administrator) by clicking on the Change PW button.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 64

Page 445: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 445/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

•The supported profiles are:• Administrator: full access also for security parameters

• Operator: person in charge to operate at network level (not at radio side)

• CraftPerson: person in charge for installation and the maintenance at radio site; full access to NE but not for securityparameters, only for own password

• Viewer: only explore the NE

•Supported operations by the profiles:

• Administrator profile: All the NE parameters are accessible both in writing and reading mode. Also the management of user accounts is allowed (create/delete user accounts and change of all passwords).

• Operator profile: Full reading access to NE parameters. For writing mode the following parameters are allowed tochange:

•  ATPC configuration (enabled, disabled)

• Performance Monitoring management

• start/stop CD

• threshold tables configuration

• reset

• archiving (only for NMS system)

• Supported for all the types of Performance Monitoring (Radio Hop/Link, E1, Received Power Levels, ....)

• NTP protocol:

• Enabled/Disabled

• NTP main server address configuration

• NTP spare server address configuration

• CraftPerson profile: This operator has the same privileges of the Administrator, but cannot manage the user accounts

• Viewer profile: This operator can only read and can change his own password.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 65

Page 446: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 446/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• By clicking on Apply button, at first JUSM performs a syntax check of each field: if there aresome errors, JUSM will display the specific message and allows the operator to correct them.

• If all parameters are correct, all parameters are sent to NE; after to have automatically closed thewindow, a message with result of the action will be displayed.

• By clicking on Cancel button, the Create User window closes and no action will be performed.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 66

Page 447: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 447/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

1. Select a user in the profile table in the Profiles Management window.

2. Clicking the Delete button. A Deletion Confirmation dialog box is displayed.

3. Click the Yes button on the dialog box. The Delete User window is displayed.

4. Enter the administrator password.

5. Click the Apply button to delete the user (or click the Cancel button to stop the deletion and

close the window.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 67

Page 448: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 448/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The Administrator can change the password of another user with the following procedure: 

1. Select the Configuration > Profiles Management > Users Management menu item.

The Profiles Management window is displayed.

2. Select the user in the profile table whose password will be changed.

3. Click the Change PW button.

The Changing Password window is displayed.

2. Enter the following in the respective fields:

• Old Password (existing user’s password) 

• New Password

• Confirm New Password

4. Click the Apply button to accept the new password or Cancel to abort the change and closethe window. 

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 68

Page 449: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 449/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

1. Select the Configuration > Profiles Management > Change Password menu item.

The Changing Password window is displayed.

2. Enter the following in the respective fields:

• Old Password (existing password)

• New Password

• Confirm New Password

3. Click the Apply button to accept the new password or Cancel to abort the change and closethe window. 

Once the Apply button is clicked, the system performs a syntax check of each field: if there areerrors, the system will display the specific message and allow the user to correct the errors.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 69

Page 450: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 450/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 70

Page 451: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 451/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The keywords are in bold the variables , are in italics. 

• To know if an MPT is grouped in a radio LAG, letter L is placed on the MPT icon on the Equipmentview, but in this view it not possible to see the association of a specific MPT to a specific RadioLAG.

• To know if an Ethernet user port is grouped in an Ethernet LAG, in the CORE-E domain in theEthernet Physical Interface tab-panel the Settings tab-panel of the Ethernet port grouped in aLAG is gray (no changes can be done), but it not possible to see the association of a specific UserEthernet port to a specific Ethernet LAG.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 71

Page 452: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 452/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 72

Page 453: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 453/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 73

Page 454: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 454/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

The Diagnosis Menu contains:

• Alarms

• Log Browsing

• Remote Inventory

• Abnormal Condition List

• Summary Block Diagram View

• Current Configuration View

• Performance Monitoring

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 74

Page 455: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 455/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

•  Alarms Monitor is an application which allows to display and store the alarms of all the NEsrequiring it.

•  Alarms Monitor can be also started by clicking on the Alarms Monitor button on NEtO.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 75

Page 456: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 456/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• On the left side of the application, below each NE, two global lists of alarms are displayed:

• CURRENT_ALARM shows all the equipment alarms currently present,•  ALARM_LOG shows all the equipment alarms currently present and the history of the

alarms (i.e. cleared alarms).

• Each global list has some default as follows:

1) CRI contains all the alarms having a CRITICAL severity

2) MAJ contains all the alarms having a MAJOR severity

3) MIN contains all the alarms having a MINOR severity

4) WRG contains all the alarms having a WARNING severity

5) IND contains all the alarms having an INDETERMINATE severity

6) CLR contains all the alarms which are in the CLEARED state, that is, which are no longer

active (this filter is available within the list ALARM_LOG only).The number of active alarms is shown inside brackets.

• The two lists can be filtered using customized filters provided by means of the menu Filters→  Add a Filter

• When an alarm is no longer active it disappears from the current Global list and it is displayed inthe ALARM_LOG list as a cleared alarm.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 76

Page 457: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 457/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• When the application is opened for the first time, only the tab-panels of the two global lists aredisplayed on the right part of the window.

• Click on a filter or on a global list on the left part of the screen shows up on the right side therelevant tab panel with all the alarms.

•  At the top right, the field Synthesis shows the number of active alarms for any severity.

• The alarms have a different color according to their severity and their state.

Red: CRITICAL alarm• Brown: MAJOR alarm

• Yellow: MINOR alarm

• Blue: WARNIG alarm

•White: INDETERMINATE alarm (Note that the equipment has no alarm having such severity)

• Green: CLEARED alarm (alarm no longer active).

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 77

Page 458: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 458/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Within the tab-panel, each alarm is provided with the information below.

• Time & Date: date and time of the alarm. The format of date and time is yyyy/mm/ddhh:mm:ss.

• Probable cause: name of the probable cause of the alarm.

• Alarm Type: alarm class (TRS = Transmission Alarm – alarm not created inside theequipment, but generated by a connected equipment or due to transmission/propagationproblems; EQUIPMENT: inside alarm of the equipment).

• Friendly Name: object of the equipment where the alarm occurred.

• Severity: alarm severity.

• Add Text: this is an additional text regarding the alarm.

• Specific problem: for some alarms, additional information is provided about the involvedresource (for instance, when a threshold alarm is raised, it states the specific thresholdexceeded)

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 78

Page 459: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 459/1149

Page 460: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 460/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 80

Page 461: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 461/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Save Log for selected NE

• Save a file with one of the two global lists of each NE. Select the global list of a specific NE,open the Save History menu for the selected NE and enter filename and relevant directory inthe opening window.

• Load Log to selected NE

• Display the global list of a certain NE previously saved.

• Remove selected NE

Remove an NE, selected in the list.

• Export Alarms

• Save a file with the alarms of the selected Log. Select the log, select "Export Alarms" menu,choose the file format (CSV, HTML, HML or PDF) and then assign the name of the file.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 81

Page 462: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 462/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The Filters menu provides the following menus:

• Close Filter - Close a currently opened filter

• Add a Filter … 

• Edit Selected Filter … 

•Delete Selected Filter … 

•Delete Filters … 

• Save Filters As … 

• Load Filters From … 

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 82

Page 463: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 463/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Filter Name field

• Enter the filter name in the Filter Name field.

• The filters can be created selecting one of the following fields (or more). To save the created filter click on the Done pushbutton. (Clicking on the Cancel pushbutton clears the filter configuration). The createdfilter appears on the left side of the application.

• Scope field

• Select APT (Current) to create a filter showing the current alarms only or select Log to create a filterfor current and cleared alarms.

• The filter can be applied to all the NEs by selecting  All or it can be applied to one or more NEs byselecting one or more NEs using the mouse.

•  Alarm Type field

• Select Alarm Type to create a filter for the selected type of alarm:

• TRS = Transmission Alarm

• EQUIPMENT = Equipment alarm

• Perceived severity field

• Select Perceived severity and then one or more severity levels and/or Cleared state to filter the alarmhaving the selected severity levels.

• Event Time field

• Select Event Time and then enter the starting date (From) and the ending date (To) to filter the alarmscreated during that specific time frame only.

• Probable Cause field

• Select Probable Cause and choose a specific alarm (one or more) to filter these particular alarms only.

• Resource field

• Put a check mark on the Resource box and write the object name the alarms of which have to be filtered(if required).

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 83

Page 464: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 464/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Cancel previously created Filters. Default filters cannot be canceled.

• Select one specific NE (or more NEs) in the Scope column, select a specific filter (or more filters)in the Filters column and then click on the Done Pushbutton.

• Click on the Cancel button to clear all the selections.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 84

Page 465: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 465/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Select in the Scope and Filters columns a specific filter to be saved, enter the filter name in theName field, select the Folder where to save the file relevant to filter and then click on the Done Pushbutton.

• Clicking on the Cancel pushbutton cleasrs all selections.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 85

Page 466: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 466/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Click on Browse to navigate and then choose the filter file to be loaded. The Scope and theLoaded Filters columns will show respectively the NE list and the filters list made available bythe selected file.

• Entering some characters in the Filters Prefix field and then clicking on the Done pushbutton,the inserted characters are attached before the names of the Loaded Filters. For instanceentering <Vim>, the names of the filters change from APT to VimAPT.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 86

Page 467: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 467/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 87

Page 468: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 468/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The following information is provided for each event:

• Time: date and time of occurrence of the event. The format is week day/month/dayhh:mm:ss. Reference Time (CEST) year.

•Notification ID: a unique identifier for the event.

• Explanation: a statement built with the event log data to explain what the event represents.

• Event Log Browser is an application which allows to display all the events occurred in the NE.The max. number of stored events is 500. An event is meant to be:

• a configuration change

a change of the value of an attribute• an automatic switchover

• a manual operation carried out by the operator.

• The Menu Bar provides the following menus:

• File

•Help

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 88

Page 469: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 469/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 89

Page 470: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 470/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The file can have the HTML, CSV , PDF or XML format. The file can store all the events ( Allentries) or only those selected by means of the pointer of the mouse (Selection).

• The Export may be executed as well clicking on the relevant pushbutton below the menu bar.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 90

Page 471: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 471/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 91

Page 472: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 472/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 92

Page 473: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 473/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

•  An abnormal condition is generated each time:

• a non usual condition is present in the NE,

• detected automatically (i.e. automatic Tx mute)

• as consequence of management systems operation (i.e. force switching, loopbacks, manualTx mute).

•The list of the events which cause an abnormal condition:

• Forced switch (EPS, RPS, TPS)• Lockout (EPS, RPS, TPS)

• Loopback activation

• Local radio Tx mute (manual)

• Adaptive Modulation in normal mode

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 93

Page 474: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 474/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The “Summary Block Diagram View” displays a global logical view (strictly related to thephysical implementation) highlighting a synthesis of all the alarms and statuses present in thesystem.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 94

Page 475: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 475/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

•Each block has its Alarm indicator (colored ball icon) that shows the alarm status by color.

• The Core-E has 2 alarm indicators in case of Core-E protection (as shown in figure) and only 1 alarm indicator (the ballicon on the left side) in case of unprotected configuration.

• In the Main view the current configuration of the MSS is shown, with the equipped units (PDH or SDH or Radio orMPTACC), with the created LAG, with the protection schemes and with the cross-connections implemented between thedifferent units and the different Ethernet ports, if any.

• Different icons identify Radio LAG or Ethernet LAG. In figure LAG #4 is a Radio LAG, LAG #1 is an Ethernet LAG.

•  An Ethernet User port involved in an Ethernet LAG disappears from the CORE-E area (in figure port #1 and #2 aregrouped in Ethernet LAG#1. Port #5 and #6 are not shown because are optional and have not been configured.

• On the RADIO/MPTACC slot icon there is the symbol because on this unit a loopback can be activated, the symbolbecause it is also possible to activate a Performance monitoring and/or the Ethernet traffic counters. If these symbols aregreen, it means that the loopback is active or the Performance monitoring/Ethernet Counters have been activated.

• By double clicking on an object it s possible to navigate to specific views. In detail:

• by double clicking on the Alarm indicator the relevant active alarm is displayed

• by double clicking on the Abnormal Condition List box, it is possible to navigate to the Abnormal Condition Listmenu;

• by double clicking on the TMN Local Interface box, it is possible to navigate to the TMN view in the Core-E unit;

• by double clicking on a PDH slot icon, it is possible to navigate to the secondary view for the PDH unit;

• by double clicking on a Radio slot icon, it is possible to navigate to the secondary view for the Radio unit;

• by double clicking on an MPTACC slot icon, it is possible to navigate to the secondary view for the MPTACC unit.

• by double clicking on a Protection switch the relevant configuration is displayed;

• by double clicking on a Loopback the relevant configuration is displayed.

• The “Refresh” button will close all secondary windows, updating the main view one, and re-opening all previouslyopened secondary windows, with updated content views.

•  All diagrams are automatically refreshed. According to following figures, bold light green lines update according to theactually NE working way; alarm icons update as well.

• The green line is the current active path.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 95

Page 476: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 476/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 96

Page 477: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 477/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The Current Configuration View contains configuration information that is organized into thefollowing categories

• Site Name & Location

• Quality of Service Configuration

• Trusted Managers

• Core Configuration (including Ethernet ports)

• LAGs Configuration

• Slots Configuration (occupied slots in MSS-8 or MSS-4)

•  XPIC Association Interface

• OSPF Areas• MTP Configuration

• DHCP Configuration

• TMN Ethernet Interface

• TMN Inband Profiles

• Static Routes

• Cross Connections

• Ring

• Bridge

• Synchronization• Software Package Status

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 97

Page 478: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 478/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 98

Page 479: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 479/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 99

Page 480: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 480/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 100

Page 481: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 481/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• To control the competition of the OS and the WebEML, a Local Access Control (LAC) is available.

• If the LAC is “access denied”, it means that the OS manages the NE and the WebEML is notallowed to modify the NE configuration (it can only «read»). In the view, the icon with a keysymbol has a circular shape.

• If the LAC is “granted”, it means that the WebEML is allowed to manage the NE. In the view, theicon with a key symbol has a rectangular shape.

• If the LAC is “requested”, it means that the WebEML has requested a permission from the OS andis waiting for a replay. However, the OS does continue to provide a certain number of services.These services include:

•  Alarm reception and processing,• Performance processing,

• Switching back to the OS access state.

• The access state of an NE can be modified from two types of views.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 101

Page 482: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 482/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

•Requested option

When the Requested option from the Access State cascading menu and the OSdoes not answer in a predefined time, it is assumed that the NE is in the Craft access stateand can be managed by a WebEML.

•OS option

Select the OS option from the Access State cascading menu. The NE is nowmanaged by the OS.

•The key symbol icon on the management states of the NE view indicates whether the NE ismanaged by a WebEML or by the OS.

•Local WebEML access is denied on recovery phase after a loss of communication of the NE. Whenthe communication with the NE is lost, the OS automatically recovers the communication and forcesthe state existing before the loss of communication (therefore, WebEML access can be denied orgranted).

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 102

Page 483: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 483/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

WARNING: After the activation of the Restart NE Command (or after the pressing of the HW resetpush-button) the supervision of the local NE and the remote NEs is lost.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 103

Page 484: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 484/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 104

Page 485: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 485/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 105

Page 486: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 486/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The Backup function saves the NE configuration using the WebEML.

• To backup the configuration write the filename in the File Name field and press Save.

• Confirm the backup operation by clicking Yes to start the operation.

• When the backup is completed in the upper part appears the list of the previously createdbackups.

Warning: The backup file name must not include the following characters: space, &, /.The file name contains always the version as prefix (example: "V020100", corresponding to version V2.1.0; "V030400", corresponding to version V3.4.0). This prefix is inserted automatically by theSW, when the MIB back-up file is created, and is used automatically by the SW, when the MIB

restore must be performed.

• There is one default repository folder of MIB back-up files for all NEs having the same SWP-release.

• The folder name is "backup", and is under the path where you have performed the Local copyof WebEML(Jusm/CT).This folder is automatically selected when you perform any of the commands of the MIBmanagement menu.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 106

Page 487: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 487/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The Restore/Activate function downloads and activates a previously created backup using theWebEML.

• Select one of the backups to be downloaded in the upper part and press Open.

• Confirm the restore operation by clicking Yes to start the operation.

• When the restore is completed a message displays prompting for activation of the restored file.Click  Yes.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 107

Page 488: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 488/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The Remove file function removes selected backups from the list.

• To remove a backup select the file in the upper part and press Remove file.

• Confirm the operation by clicking Yes to start the operation.

• By pressing Refresh the list in the upper part of the screen is updated.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 108

Page 489: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 489/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The following fields are present:

• RMU Serial Number: in this read-only field appears the Serial Number of the Flash Card.

• License String: in this read-only field appears the type of the license written in the Flash Card.

• License Key: this field is used to upgrade the license. To upgrade the license copy in this fieldthe code of the new license and click on Apply.

• The Refresh button activates a new reading of the read-only fields.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 109

Page 490: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 490/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 110

Page 491: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 491/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 111

Page 492: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 492/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 112

Page 493: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 493/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 113

Page 494: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 494/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The ODU300 is identified by a number indicating the slot number in the MSS, where the Modemunit is installed.

• The MPT-HC or MPT-MC (ETSI market) is identified by two digits:

• the first digit indicating the slot number in the MSS, where the MPT Access unit is installed(if the MPT is connected to the port of the Core-E unit the digit is 1),

• the second digit indicating the enabled Ethernet port in the MPT Access unit or in the Core-E unit (from 1 to 6).

• The icon of the MPT-HC or MPT-MC will appear only if the MPT Access unit has been configured inthe MSS and one port (from 1 to 4) has been enabled.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 114

Page 495: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 495/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 115

Page 496: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 496/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 116

Page 497: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 497/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The Resource Tree area contains a list of empty slots that have to be configured.

The icon is used to identify an empty slot.

To configure a card:

1. Select a slot.

2. Click the Settings panel.

3. Select the unit type in the Equipment type profile.

4. Click  Apply.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 117

Page 498: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 498/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

For every unit there are 3 tab-panels:

• Alarms

• Settings

• Remote Inventory

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 118

Page 499: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 499/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The Alarms tab panel provides the fault management, which checks the current state of alarmsrelated to the selected object.

• The alarm tab panel has one row for each possible alarm, but only rows related to the activealarms are highlighted. When the alarm disappears it is automatically cleared in the screen.

• Clicking the Include alarms from sub-nodes check box causes the alarms currently active inthe sub-nodes of the object to appear.

• For every alarm the following information is given:

• Severity: the severity associated to the alarm and assigned in the Alarm Profile

• Event Time: the time of the generation of the alarm

• Entity: the entity involved in the alarm

• Probable Cause: the probable cause of the alarm

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 119

Page 500: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 500/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

In the Setting tab-panel the following fields are present:

• Equipment Type

• Alarm Profile

• Protection Type Configuration

• Protection Type Configuration with MPT Access unit

• Protection Type Configuration with STM-1 units

• Unit stacking

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 120

Page 501: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 501/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The operator must set for all the slots the expected equipment type.

• The list box shows the expected equipment type for slot 3 to 8;

• Select the unit type in the equipment type profile and click  Apply.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 121

Page 502: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 502/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The Core-E Ethernet ports can be configured in 2 ways:

• GigaEthernet interface for Ethernet traffic (Note: for port#5 and port#6 the optional SFPmust be installed);

• MPT interface: MPT-HC or MPT-MC to port#1 to port#4; an MPT-HC only to port#5 andport#6.

• Select the option (SFP or MPT-HC/MPT-MC) and click on Apply.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 122

Page 503: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 503/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• In the Setting tab-panel one or two of the four Ethernet ports (to be connected to the MPT-HC orMPT-MC) must be enabled as shown in figure above.

• Select as Usage MPT-HC or MPT-MC (in 2 ports max) and click on Apply.

• Port#1 and Port#2 are electrical Ethernet ports and Port#3 and Port#4 are optical Ethernetports.

• Port#1 and Port#3, Port#2 and Port#4 are mutually exclusive.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 123

Page 504: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 504/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The Settings tab-panel of the STM-1 unit is shown above.

• The Equipment type can be "SDHACC" or "SDHCHAN"

• Select the optical SFP (SFP-O) or the electrical SFP (SFP-E) installed on the STM-1 ports(SFP#1 and/or SFP#2 with SDHACC, only SFP#1 with SDHCHAN) and click  Apply.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 124

Page 505: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 505/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Port #5 to #8 can be configured to accept an optical SFP.

• Select option SFP and click  Apply.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 125

Page 506: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 506/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

This function relates to an alarm severity profile to be assigned to a selected object (it has beenimplemented in MSS shelf, in Local TMN Ethernet interface and in the Radio object). 

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 126

Page 507: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 507/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• This function allows the operator to configure the NE protection type. This function is shownselecting slots 3 to 8 only.

• Configuring a 1+1 protected board, if peer board is not configured, the WebEML will be in chargeof applying such configuration to un-configured peer board, before creating protection in MIB.

• If the user applies a new expected protection type, both tree view and configuration panel arereloaded and updated. With a configured 1+1 protection, involved slots are bounded by lightgreen lines.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 127

Page 508: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 508/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

To configure the protection scheme select the MPT.

1. In the example MPT-HC#52: connected to Port#2 of the MPT Access unit in Slot#5.

2. Choose in the Protect Port field one port available in the list. As protection can be also usedan MPT connected to the same MPT Access unit.

3. Choose the suitable Protection Type (1+1 FD or 1+1 HSB) and click on  Apply.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 128

Page 509: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 509/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

 After the configuration in the screen will appear the two jointed MPT-HC.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 129

Page 510: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 510/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

The field Protection Type appear only when the 2 STM-1 units have the same configuration (onlywith SFP-O, not with SFP-E).

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 130

Page 511: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 511/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Two MPTACCess units or two P8ETH units installed on the same row are automatically grouped ina stacking configuration.

• The stacking configuration is highlighted in green as shown in the following figure (units in slots#3 and #4).

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 131

Page 512: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 512/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Selecting from either the equipment tree or the resource area will display remote inventory data if it is available.

• The Remote Inventory tab displays information for a piece of equipment that is selected eitherfrom the resource tree or from the work area.

• In the example above, the Core-E card (Slot#1 MSS/CORE-MAIN) is selected from the ResourceTree. It is also highlighted in the MSS-8 that is displayed in the work area.

• Clicking on the Remote Inventory tab displays information for the selected Core-E card in theexample.

•  A read-only copy of the remote inventory for the entire NE can be generated from the Diagnosis Menu.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 132

Page 513: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 513/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 133

Page 514: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 514/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The 1+1 protection schemes implemented are:

• Equipment protection: EPS protection in Tx and Rx sides (this protection scheme can beimplemented for all the unit types: Modem unit, PDH unit and Core-E unit)

• Rx Radio protection: RPS Hitless Switch in Rx side

•HSB protection: Hot Stand-by protection (available for the Radio unit only)

• FD protection: Frequency Diversity protection (available for the Radio unit only)

• The Synchronization protection scheme will appear, if in the synchronization tab panel thePrimary Source and the Secondary Source have been selected or the NE has been configured asMaster with Free Running mode.

• For the pair of Core-E units (slot 1 and 2) the only protection type is the Equipment Protection.

• For the pair of Radio units or MPT Access units the protection type are the EquipmentProtection, Radio Protection and HSB Protection or FD protection.

• For the pair of PDH units the only protection type is the Equipment Protection.

• For the pair of SDH units the only protection type is the Equipment Protection (ETSI market).

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 134

Page 515: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 515/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Protection Scheme Parameters 

• The tab-panel “Scheme Parameters” displays the parameters that can be modified. 

• The parameters are:

• Protection Type: this parameter is defined at creation time and it is read only. The supportedtype is: 1+1, e.g. a working channel (Main) is protected by a protecting channel (Spare).

• Restoration Criteria: it defines if automatic restoration from protecting to protected channelis allowed (revertive mode) or inhibited (not revertive mode). The operator choice for “Restoration Criteria” will be applied by clicking on “ Apply” button. 

• The Core-E protection type is Not-Revertive and cannot be changed. The PDH/SDH protectiontype is Not-Revertive and cannot be changed.

• In case of 1+1 HSB-EPS, the restoration criteria are always grayed out. No changes can be doneseparately for 1+1 HSB-EPS. The restoration criteria selected for HSB-TPS will be applied to EPSautomatically.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 135

Page 516: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 516/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 136

Page 517: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 517/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 137

Page 518: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 518/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The Synchronization window contains the following settings panels:

• Sync Ports

• Role

• Restoration

• Primary Source

• Secondary Source

The Synchronization window contains the following buttons:

•  Apply

• Help

• Refresh

• SSM Summary

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 138

Page 519: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 519/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The physical interfaces to be assigned to Primary and Secondary synchronization sources can bechosen among the following:

[1] Free Run Local Oscillator. Quality Level value is fixed to QL-SEC/EEC1 (G.812/G8262), thevalue of QL Priority is Master1 if the NEC is configured as Master and Slave1 if the NEC isconfigured as Slave.

[2] Any E1 available at input traffic interfaces (the specific E1 port has to be chosen). Defaultvalue for Quality Level is QL-SSU-A (G.812).

[3] A specific synchronization signal available from the dedicated Sync-In port, which can beconfigured according the following options:

a) 2.048 MHz, electrical levels according to G.703, clause 13; b) 5 MHz, + 6 dBm into 50 ohm, sine-wave;

c) 10 MHz, + 6 dBm into 50 ohm, sine-wave;

d) 1.024 MHz, electrical levels according to G.703, clause 13 with the followingexceptions:

{ timing properly scaled from 2.048 MHz to 1.024 MHz.

[4] The Symbol Rate of the RX signal of any available Radio (the specific Radio Port has to bechosen). When the SSM support is enabled the QL and QL Priority are acquired from ESMC PDUsreceived on the specific radio interface.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 139

Page 520: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 520/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The physical interfaces to be assigned to Primary and Secondary synchronization sources can bechosen among the following:

[5] Any Synchronous Ethernet clock source available at enabled User Ethernet traffic interfaces(both electrical and optical) configured in synchronous slave operation mode (the specific UserEthernet port has to be chosen).

[6] Any STM1 available at SDH input traffic interfaces (the specific STM1 port must be selected).

[7] None of the above, this means that no physical synchronization interface is assigned to thesynchronization clock source input. In case of failure of the other clock source input the CRUenters the Holdover state.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 140

Page 521: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 521/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Some rules have to be followed while assigning the Primary and Secondary clock sources.

The NEC has to be defined (configured) as Master or Slave.

• If a specific interface is chosen as Primary, it cannot be selected as Secondary too.

• If an E1/T1 is chosen to be Primary source, another E1/T1 coming from the same peripheralcannot be selected as Secondary source and vice-versa.

• If an MPT radio interface is chosen to be Primary source, another MPT radio interfaceconnected to the same MPT Access peripheral cannot be selected as Secondary source andvice-versa.

• If an STM1 is chosen to be Primary source, another STM1 coming from the same peripheralcannot be selected as Secondary source and vice-versa.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 141

Page 522: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 522/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Only one Master is allowed in the network.

• If Master:

• The Restoration Mode must be chosen between Revertive and Non-Revertive;

• The Primary clock source input must be chosen among 1), 2), 3), 5) or 6).

• If the selected Master Primary clock source input is 1:

• the Master Secondary clock source input doesn't need to be selected because the Primary isnever supposed to fail. If the selected Master Primary clock source input is 2), 3), 5) or 6):

• the Master Secondary clock source input must be selected among 1), 2), 3), 5), 6) or 7).

• If Slave:

• The Restoration Mode is fixed to Revertive.

• The Primary clock source input must be chosen among 3), 4) or 5). Slave Primary clock source input is allowed to be 3) or 5) for full indoor configuration and for Piling configuration.

• The Secondary clock source input must be chosen among 1), 2), 3), 4), 5), 6) or 7).

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 142

Page 523: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 523/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

By pressing the SSM Summary button the SSM summary Table opens, which shows the SSM status(enabled/disabled) of the interfaces carrying the SSM messages.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 143

Page 524: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 524/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 144

Page 525: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 525/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 145

Page 526: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 526/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• This menu (available in the Main view) contains a summary table for all the implemented cross-connections. This menu is shown in the figure above.

• In the Resource Detail Area are available two different functions usable to export and save cross-connections data with different formats:

• hardcopy (Send To Printer);

• file (Export To File).

This menu (available in the Main view) contains a summary table for all the implemented cross-connections. This menu is shown in the figure above.

• In the Resource Detail Area are available two different functions usable to export and save cross-connections data with different formats:

• hardcopy (Send To Printer);

• file (Export To File).

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 146

Page 527: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 527/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 147

Page 528: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 528/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

This is another method of monitoring alarms.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 148

Page 529: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 529/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

 Your 9500 MPR username and password

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 149

Page 530: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 530/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 150

Page 531: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 531/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 151

Page 532: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 532/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 152

Page 533: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 533/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 153

Page 534: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 534/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 154

Page 535: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 535/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client/server protocol that automatically provides anInternet Protocol (IP) host with its IP address and other related configuration information such as thesubnet mask and default gateway.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 155

Page 536: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 536/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 156

Page 537: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 537/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The Community String (CS) acts like a password to control access to an NE. It defines whatcommunity of people can access the NE.

• Two community strings are supported:

• Get CS

• Default value: public

• Both Read and Read-Write objects operate in Read mode only

• Set CS

• Default value: private

• Both Read and Read-Write objects operate in their respective modes

NOTE: Provisioning new Community Strings will cause a loss of communication on ALL NEtOsession currently active.

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 157

Page 538: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 538/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 158

Page 539: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 539/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 159

Page 540: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 540/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 160

Page 541: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 541/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 1

Page 542: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 542/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.4 2012-07-01 AL University First edition

4.0 2012-09-14 AL University First edition

Page 543: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 543/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 3

Page 544: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 544/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 4

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 545: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 545/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 5

Page

1 Configuration View 71.1 Configuration View screen 8 2 ODU300 Views and Settings 112.1 Equipment View - Radio Modem 122.2 MOD300 Settings - Direction area 132.3 MOD300 Settings - Direction area 162.4 MOD300 Settings - Channel area 17 3 MPT-HC Views and Settings 193.1 Equipment View - Radio Modem 203.2 Direction area 213.3 Channel area 283.4 Power Source 32 4 MPT-MC Views and Settings 33

4.1 Direction area 344.2 Channel area 394.3 Channel area 414.4 Channel area 42 5 Radio Measurements Tab 435.1 Radio Modem Power Measurements Graphic 445.2 How to read a Power Measurement file 48 6 MPTACC Settings 496.1 Provision MPTACC 50 7 PDH Access Card Views and Settings 577.1 Provision Plug-In Cards 587.2 Provision Plug-In Cards 59 8 SDH Access Card Views and Settings 63

8.1 Provision Plug-In Cards 64 9 Ethernet Ports Configuration 699.1 CSM-E/Core-E Ethernet Ports 709.2 EAS/P8ETH Ethernet Ports 719.3 Advanced Ethernet functions for Core-E, EAS, and PETH 729.3.1 Storm Control Ingress 739.3.2 Port Rate Limiter Ingress or Egress 749.3.3 VLAN Rate Limiter Ingress 759.3.4 C-VLAN Translation 769.4 Per-VLAN-Per-CoS Rate Limiter 779.5 TMN Interface 829.6 TMN In-band 839.7 TMN Ethernet port 84 

10 Ethernet Ring Configuration 8710.1 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) overview 8810.2 ERP Configuration Procedure 8910.3 Configuration example of an Ethernet ring 97 11 QoS Configuration 9911.1 QoS Configuration - Queue Size Configuration 10011.2 QoS Configuration - QoS Classification 10111.3 QoS Configuration - QoS Classification 105 12 LAG Configuration 11112.1 LAG Creation Rules 11212.2 LAG Creation 11312.3 LAG Removal 117 13 XPIC Configuration 119

13.1 XPIC Configuration 120 14 VLAN Configuration 12714.1 VLAN Configuration - 802.1Q 128

Page 546: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 546/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 6

Page

14.2 VLAN Configuration - Ethernet Ring 130

Page 547: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 547/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 7

Page 548: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 548/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The Current Configuration View contains configuration information that is organized into thefollowing categories

• Site Name & Location

• Quality of Service Configuration

• Trusted Managers

• Core Configuration (including Ethernet ports)

• LAGs Configuration

• Slots Configuration (occupied slots in MSS-8 or MSS-4)

•  XPIC Association Interface

• OSPF Areas• MTP Configuration

• DHCP Configuration

• TMN Ethernet Interface

• TMN Inband Profiles

• Static Routes

• Cross Connections

• Ring

• Bridge

• Synchronization• Software Package Status

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 8

Page 549: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 549/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

The File menu supports the following:

• Save As  –  Save the configuration view as a text file.

• Print  –  Send a copy of the configuration view to a printer.

• Exit  –  Close the Configuration View screen.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 9

Page 550: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 550/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 10

Page 551: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 551/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 11

Page 552: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 552/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 12

Page 553: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 553/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 13

Page 554: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 554/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The operation mode can be without or with the Adaptive Modulation.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 14

Page 555: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 555/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The main idea behind Adaptive Modulation in Point to Point system is to adjust adaptively themodulation as well as a range of other system parameters based on the near-instantaneouschannel quality information perceived by the receiver, which is fed back to the transmitter withthe aid of a feedback channel.

• The switching between the modulation schemes is hitless and maintains the same RF channelbandwidth.

• The Adaptive Modulation is available for unprotected (1+0) and Protected (1+1 HSB) without ATPC.

• Example: if the default switching threshold is -64 dBm by setting +4 dB the new value is -60

dBm and by setting -2 dB the new value is -66 dBm.

• Note: If the current Modulation scheme is 4 QAM, it not possible to force to 64 QAM, but first must be forced to 16 QAM and then to 64 QAM. Also if the current Modulation is 64 QAM, to passto 4 QAM first must be forced to 16 QAM and then to 4 QAM.

• Warning: with the up and down arrows, below the Forced Modulation field, it is possible toincrease or decrease the part of the screen relevant to the parameters of the AdaptiveModulation.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 15

Page 556: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 556/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

3) Link Identifier

This part allows the operator to define the expected and sent identifier values of parameters relatedto the link management and, if necessary, modify them.

The operator choices will be sent to the NE by clicking on the related “ Apply” button.

If the Link Identifier is Enabled the following fields can be written:

zExpected Identifier: this field is the link identifier expected at the receiving NE

zSent Identifier: this field is the link identifier inserted on the transmitting NE (range: 1-256).

4) PPP RF

The “PPP-RF” interface is a communication interface based on the use of an inframe RF proprietary64 kbit/s channel. Through the “PPP-RF” interface the NE can exchange management messageswith a remote OS (or Craft Terminal) station.

The PPP-RF channel can be Enabled or Disabled.

5) Alarm Profile 

Not implemented in the current release.

6) Synchronization 

Tick on Enable to enable the transmission of the SSM message over the radio channel.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 16

Page 557: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 557/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

1) Frequency - The system can operate with different types of ODU according to the RF bandand to the channel arrangement. In the Shifter field select the suitable shifter. In the Tx frequency field insert the suitable Tx frequency and press Apply. Press the Data Help button the list of all the available ODUs with the relevant P/N, shifter and Tx frequency willappear. The Data Help table is useful, if you are not connected to the ODU.

2)  ATPC The ATPC can be Enabled or Disabled. The new value will be applied when the Apply button is pressed. If the ATPC has been enabled, the ATPC Range and ATPC Rx Threshold parameters must be filled.

3) Manual Transmit Power Control

Manual Transmit Power Control (without Adaptive Modulation) - If the ATPC is disabledthe manual Tx Power field is present. For the Tx Power range refer to the table.

Tx Power (with Adaptive Modulation) - The operator can modify only the 4 QAM field. Inthis field the operator has to enter the constant power, which will be used with 4 QAMmodulation.

4) Tx Mute - The information related to the transmitter status is shown in the Tx Mute field(Off/Manual/Auto). To squelch the transmitter select Enable and press Apply button.

5) Alarm Profile - By clicking on the icon the Alarm Severity Profile menu opens, which allows toassociate to the radio channel a specific alarm profile. Select one Alarm Profile in the ProfileName list (4 alarm profiles are listed) and click Apply. Tick the Show details check box to see theseverity associated to each alarm.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 17

Page 558: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 558/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 18

Page 559: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 559/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 19

Page 560: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 560/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 20

Page 561: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 561/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 21

Page 562: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 562/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• The operation mode can be without or with the Adaptive Modulation.

• The SDH capacity mask must be selected in the following two profiles:

z In the first case 1xSTM-1 or 72 E1s can be transmitted.

z In the second case 2xSTM-1 or 145 E1s can be transmitted.

CS (MHz) FCM Mode Modulation # E1 TDM2TDM # STM-1 SDH2SDH

28 128QAM 72 1

56 128QAM 145 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 22

Page 563: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 563/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

•  Adaptive Modulation in a Point to Point system adjusts the modulation as well as a range of othersystem parameters based on the near-instantaneous channel quality information perceived by thereceiver, which is fed back to the transmitter with the aid of a feedback channel.

• The switching between the modulation schemes is hitless and maintains the same RF channelbandwidth.

•  Adaptive Modulation is available for unprotected (1+0) and Protected (1+1 HSB/1+1 FD) Radioconfiguration without ATPC).

• The SDH capacity mask must be selected in the following two profiles:

z In the first case 1xSTM-1 or 72 E1s can be transmitted.

z In the second case 2xSTM-1 or 145 E1s can be transmitted.

Note: The Remote Switching Threshold is not supported.

Note: If the current Modulation scheme is 4 QAM, it not possible to force to 64 QAM, but first must be forced to 16 QAM and then to 64 QAM. Also if the current Modulation is 64 QAM, to pass to4 QAM first must be forced to 16 QAM and then to 4 QAM.

Warning: with the up and down arrows, below the Forced Modulation field, it is possible toincrease or decrease the part of the screen relevant to the parameters of the Adaptive Modulation.

CS (MHz) FCM Mode Modulation # E1 TDM2TDM # STM-1 SDH2SDH

28 128QAM 72 1

56 128QAM 145 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 23

Page 564: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 564/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 24

Page 565: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 565/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 25

Page 566: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 566/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• This field is available only with the MPT-HC V2 with the XPIC+RPS external module installed andif in the Mode area in the Option field a mask with XPIC has been selected.

• Note: The XPIC can be implemented in 1+0 or 1+1 HSB with the Static Modulation or AdaptiveModulation.

• How to configure the XPIC

1. In the Polarization field select the polarization to be used by the radio channel (Vertical orHorizontal).

2. Go in the XPIC Configuration menu by clicking the relevant button in the Tool bar. Refer toXPIC Configuration.

3. Now in the Associated Interface field will appear the radio channel associated in the XPICConfiguration.

4. By clicking on the icon on the right of the Associated Interface field you can navigate to theassociated radio channel menu.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 26

Page 567: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 567/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

4) Link Identifier

This part allows the operator to define the expected and sent identifier values of parameters relatedto the link management and, if necessary, modify them. The operator choices will be sent to the NEby clicking on the related “ Apply” button.

If the Link Identifier is Enabled the following fields can be written:

• Expected Identifier: this field is the link identifier expected at the receiving NE

• Sent Identifier: this field is the link identifier inserted on the transmitting NE (range: 0-256).

5) PPP RF

The “PPP-RF” interface is a communication interface based on the use of an inframe RF proprietary64 kbit/s channel. Through the “PPP-RF” interface the NE can exchange management messageswith a remote OS (or Craft Terminal) station. The PPP-RF channel can be Enabled or Disabled.

If enabled, in the Remote  Address field will appear the IP address of the remote connected NE. Inthe Routing IP Protocol field enter the used IP protocol and in case of OSPF protocol select alsothe associated OSPF area.

6) Alarm Profile 

Not implemented in the current release. 

7) Synchronization 

Tick on Enable to enable the transmission of the SSM message over the radio channel.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 27

Page 568: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 568/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The Channel #1 area is always present (in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration). The Channel #0 area ispresent in 1+1 configuration only.

Warning: To configure the unit first configure the Shifter and the Tx Frequency in theFrequency field (in the Channel menu) and click on Apply. Then configure all the otherparameters.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 28

Page 569: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 569/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

1) Frequency

The system can operate with different types of ODU according to the RF band and to the channelarrangement. There are ODUs which can manage only one shifter or several predefined shifters. Inthe Shifter field select the suitable shifter.

In the Tx frequency field insert the suitable Tx frequency (the Rx frequency is automaticallycalculated by using the inserted Tx frequency and the shifter) and press push-button Apply.

In the Rx frequency field will appear the calculated Rx frequency, but this frequency can bechanged in +5 MHz range to implement the “Exotic” shifter configuration, if required. Change theRx frequency and press Apply.

2) ATPC

The ATPC can be Enabled or Disabled.

The new value will be applied when the Apply button is pressed. If the ATPC has been enabled,the ATPC Range and ATPC Rx Threshold parameters must be filled.

 ATPC Range

• The Min Tx power and Max Tx power, regarding the Tx Range in the ATPC management,can be written in the relevant field.

• When the Apply button is pressed the new values will be applied.

• ATPC Rx Threshold

• The value of the low power threshold can be changed by writing the new value in the field.When the Rx power is equal to this power the ATPC algorithm starts to operate.

• When the Apply button is pressed the new values will be applied.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 29

Page 570: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 570/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The same power value will be used by the other modulation schemes

3) Manual Transmit Power Control

Manual Transmit Power Control (without Adaptive Modulation)

• If the ATPC is disabled the manual Tx Power field is present. For the Tx Power range refer tothe table.

• In this field write the new value within the allowed transmitted power range. The range isshown on the right side of Manual Transmit Power Control area.

Tx Power (with Adaptive Modulation)

The operator can modify only the Tx power relevant to the lowest modulation scheme. In thisfield the operator has to enter the constant power, which will be used with the lowestmodulation.

4) RSL Driving Criteria

Select in the RSL Driving Criteria field the suitable value. In 1+1 FD and HSB configurations boththe transmitters can be driven by the lowest or by the highest RSL values of the two remotedemodulators.

5) MSE Driving Criteria

Select in the MSE Driving Criteria field the suitable value. In 1+1 FD and HSB configurations boththe transmitters can be driven by the lowest (1) or by the highest MSE values (2) of the two remotedemodulators.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 30

Page 571: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 571/1149

Page 572: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 572/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Two Sources are available because the MPT Access unit can interface two MPT.

• If the Type is Disabled no power supply is provided to the MPT.

•  After the power supply selection click on Apply.

• The Alarm Profile field is not supported.

Warning: An MPT-MC or an MPT-HC V2 can be connected to an external Power Injector Box whichadds the Power Supply and the Ethernet Traffic on the same cable. In this case the Power SourceType must be Disabled.

• Mode 1 - QMA (MPT-HC only)

• This mode is the default mode.

• In this mode the MPT-HC is power supplied with a dedicated coaxial cable connected on theQMA connector on the front panel of the MPT Access unit

• Mode 2 - PFoE (Power Feed on Ethernet)

• In this mode the MPT-HC or MPT-MC are power supplied by using the electrical Ethernetcable.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 32

Page 573: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 573/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 33

Page 574: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 574/1149

Page 575: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 575/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The operation mode can be without or with the Adaptive Modulation.

• Note: The SDH capacity mask must be selected in the following profile:

z In the first case 1xSTM-1 or 72 E1s can be transmitted.

CS (MHz) FCM Mode Modulation # E1 TDM2TDM # STM-1 SDH2SDH

28 128QAM 72 1

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 35

Page 576: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 576/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

•  Adaptive Modulation in a Point to Point system is to adjusts the modulation as well as a range of other system parameters based on the near-instantaneous channel quality information perceivedby the receiver, which is fed back to the transmitter with the aid of a feedback channel.

• The switching between the modulation schemes is hitless and maintains the same RF channelbandwidth.

• The Adaptive Modulation is available for unprotected (1+0) and Protected (1+1 HSB/1+1 FD)Radio configuration without ATPC).

Note: The SDH capacity mask must be selected in the following profile:

z In the first case 1xSTM-1 or 72 E1s can be transmitted.

• In 1+1 configuration the Driving MSE field is not supported.

• The Remote Switching Threshold is not supported.

• Example: if the current Modulation scheme is 4 QAM, it not possible to force to 64 QAM, butfirst must be forced to 16 QAM and then to 64 QAM. Also if the current Modulation is 64 QAM, topass to 4 QAM first must be forced to 16 QAM and then to 4 QAM.

Warning: with the up and down arrows, below the Forced Modulation field, it is possible toincrease or decrease the part of the screen relevant to the parameters of the Adaptive Modulation.

CS (MHz) FCM Mode Modulation # E1 TDM2TDM # STM-1 SDH2SDH

28 128QAM 72 1

56 128QAM 145 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 36

Page 577: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 577/1149

Page 578: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 578/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

3) XPIC Configuration - Not available with the MPT-MC.

4) Link Identifier

This part allows the operator to define the expected and sent identifier values of parameters relatedto the link management and, if necessary, modify them. The operator choices will be sent to the NEby clicking on the related “ Apply” button. If the Link Identifier is Enabled the following fields can bewritten:

zExpected Identifier: this field is the link identifier expected at the receiving NE

zSent Identifier: this field is the link identifier inserted on the transmitting NE (range: 0-256).

5) PPP RFThe “PPP-RF” interface is a communication interface based on the use of an inframe RF proprietary64 kbit/s channel. Through the “PPP-RF” interface the NE can exchange management messageswith a remote OS (or Craft Terminal) station. The PPP-RF channel can be Enabled or Disabled.

If enabled, in the Remote  Address field will appear the IP address of the remote connected NE.

In the Routing IP Protocol field enter the used IP protocol and in case of OSPF protocol selectalso the associated OSPF area.

6) Alarm Profile - Not implemented in the current release.

7) Synchronization Click on Enable to enable the transmission of the SSM message over the radio channel.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 38

Page 579: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 579/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• The Channel #1 area is always present (in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration). The Channel #0 area ispresent in 1+1 configuration only.

Warning: To configure the unit first configure the Shifter and the Tx Frequency in theFrequency field (in the Channel menu) and click on Apply. Then configure all the otherparameters.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 39

Page 580: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 580/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Warning: To configure the unit first configure the Shifter and the Tx Frequency in theFrequency field (in the Channel menu) and click  Apply. Then configure all the other parameters.

1) Frequency

The system operate with different types of ODUs according to the RF band and channels.

In the Tx frequency field insert the suitable Tx frequency (the Rx frequency is automaticallycalculated by using the inserted Tx frequency and the shifter) and press push-button Apply.

In the Rx frequency field will appear the calculated Rx frequency, but this frequency can bechanged in +5 MHz range to implement the “Exotic” shifter configuration, ipress Apply.

2) ATPC

The ATPC can be Enabled or Disabled.

The new value will be applied when the Apply button is pressed. If the ATPC has been enabled,the ATPC Range and ATPC Rx Threshold parameters must be filled.

 ATPC Range

• The Min Tx power and Max Tx power, regarding the Tx Range in the ATPC management,can be written in the relevant field.

• When the Apply button is pressed the new values will be applied.

 ATPC Rx Threshold

• The value of the low power threshold can be changed by writing the new value in the field.When the Rx power is equal to this power the ATPC algorithm starts to operate.

• When the Apply button is pressed the new values will be applied.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 40

Page 581: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 581/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Warning: To configure the unit first configure the Shifter and the Tx Frequency in theFrequency field (in the Channel menu) and click on Apply. Then configure all the otherparameters.

3) Manual Transmit Power Control

Manual Transmit Power Control (without Adaptive Modulation)

• If the ATPC is disabled the manual Tx Power field is present. For the Tx Power range refer tothe table.

• In this field write the new value within the allowed transmitted power range. The range isshown on the right side of Manual Transmit Power Control area.

Tx Power (with Adaptive Modulation)

The operator can modify only the Tx power relevant to the lowest modulation scheme. In this fieldthe operator has to enter the constant power, which will be used with the lowest modulation. 

4) RSL Driving Criteria

Select in the RSL Driving Criteria field the suitable value. In 1+1 FD and HSB configurations boththe transmitters can be driven by the lowest or by the highest RSL values of the two remotedemodulators.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 41

Page 582: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 582/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Warning: To configure the unit first configure the Shifter and the Tx Frequency in theFrequency field (in the Channel menu) and click on Apply. Then configure all the otherparameters.

5) MSE Driving Criteria

Select in the MSE Driving Criteria field the suitable value. In 1+1 FD and HSB configurations boththe transmitters can be driven by the lowest (1) or by the highest MSE values (2) of the two remotedemodulators.

6) Tx Mute 

The information related to the transmitter status is shown in the Tx Mute field (Off/Manual/Auto).To squelch the transmitter select Enable and press Apply button.

The following indications will appear in the Tx Mute field:

• Off : Transmitter not squelch

• Manual: Transmitter squelched due to the manual operation

• Auto: Transmitter squelched due to an automatic operation

7) Alarm Profile 

By clicking on the icon the Alarm Severity Profile menu opens, which allows to associate to the radio

channel a specific alarm profile. Select one Alarm Profile in the Profile Name list (4 alarm profiles arelisted) and click  Apply. Click Show details check box to see the severity associated to each alarm.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 42

Page 583: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 583/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 43

Page 584: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 584/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• "Measurement interval" fields - The default is Days: 7, Hours: 0, Minutes: 0. A 7-daymeasurement interval is also the maximum allowed interval.

• "Sample time" field - The choice is among 2, 4, 6, 30, 60 sec. The last section of the dialog isreferred to an optional Log file. By selecting Create File the log file is created and a defaultpath and name for this file is displayed to the operator. The file is stored in theMPRE_CT_V00.07.08 directory.

• The log file contains the sample value and records the measurement up to a maximumdimension (7 days for a 2 s sample time).

• The file name must not include the following characters: \ ? : * “ < > |. 

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 44

Page 585: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 585/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

By clicking on the "Start" button the screen "Power Measurement Graphic" appears.• The Power Measurement Graphic is available only if the WebEML is connected to the NE.

• The Power Measurement Graphic screen shows the Tx and Rx measurements related to the localand remote NE. The operator can see, in real time, the power transmitted by the local and remotetransmitter (Tx) and the power received by the local and remote receiver (Rx).

• The top graphic screen area shows the TX curves (local and remote), while the bottom areashows the Rx curves (local and remote). Note that the colors represent the linked end-point of the two NE; for example, if the local TX is blue, the remote receiver will also have the same color.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 45

Page 586: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 586/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The top of the screen offers all the characteristics present in the current measurement:

• Radio port: gives the symbolic name associated to the radio channel being analyzed

• Sample time: indicates the frequency used to send the measurement requests to NE

• Start time: is the first request time

• Stop time: is the interval time selected in the previous parameters window, added to the starttime

• Time: is the current response time

• Log File: is the complete pathname of the file where the received values are stored.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 46

Page 587: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 587/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• When not receiving any signal, RSL value is not set to a fixed specific value.WARNING:

• Radio analog transmitted power level (local ODU)

• In case of ICP or Cable Loss alarms the value shown at management system is -99.8 dBm.

• In case of mute status the value shown at management system is -100 dBm. I

• f the power level read is out of the allowed range, the value shown by the management system is -101 dBm.

• Radio analog received power level (local ODU)

• In case of ICP or Cable Loss alarms the value shown at management system is -99.8 dBm.

• In case of failure on reading the register containing the received power the value shown at management system is -99.7 dBm.

• If the power level read is out of the allowed range, the value shown by the management system is -101 dBm.

• Radio analog transmitted power level (remote ODU)

In case of broken radio link the value shown at management system is -99.6 dBm.• In case of mute status the value shown at management system is -100 dBm. In case of failure on reading the

register containing the remote transmitted power the value shown at management system is -99.7 dBm.

• If the power level read is out of the allowed range, the value shown by the management system is -101 dBm. Incase of alarms on the remote NE on one of the two radio channels in HSB configuration (typically ICP, Cable Loss,Card Missing, Card Fail), the value shown by the management system is -127 dBm.

• Radio analog received power level (remote ODU) 

• In case of failure on reading the register containing the remote received power the value shown at managementsystem is -99.7 dBm.

• If the power level read is out of the allowed range, the value shown by the management system is -101 dBm.

• In case of alarms on the remote NE on one of the two radio channels in HSB configuration (typically ICP, CableLoss, Card Missing, Card Fail), the value shown by the management system is -127 dBm.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 47

Page 588: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 588/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

1. Click the Read File box and press the Select File button.

The directory of the WebEML automatically opens to navigate to the power measurement file.

2. Select the desired file and click the Open. The selected file will appear in the Log file field.

3. Click button Start (on the right side of the Sample Time field). The file opens.

The buttons in the lower part of the window allow to flow the graph within the measurementinterval.

•  As default the measurement files are stored in the MPRE_CT_Vxx.xx.xx directory and haveextension .txt.

• The measurement file can be opened also with a standard text editor (e.g. WordPad). Go in thedirectory where the txt files have been stored and open the file. The measurements are shown inthe tabular mode.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 48

Page 589: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 589/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 49

Page 590: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 590/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 50

Page 591: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 591/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

To unprovision an MPT:

1. perform a Tx Mute

2. unprovision the MPT

3. remove the power supply.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 51

Page 592: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 592/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• With the Presetting mode the Adaptive modulation is disabled.

• This field is available only with the MPT-HC V2 with the XPIC+RPS external module installed andif in the Mode area in the Option field a mask with XPIC has been selected.

• The XPIC can be configured in 1+0 or 1+1 HSB (no adaptive modulation, no ATPC).NOT ALL the channel spacings and modulation schemes can support the XPIC Configuration.

Select the suitable Polarization: Vertical or Horizontal.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 52

Page 593: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 593/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 53

Page 594: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 594/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 54

Page 595: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 595/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 55

Page 596: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 596/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 56

Page 597: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 597/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 57

Page 598: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 598/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 58

Page 599: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 599/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

Flow Id number: is system unique and must not be repeated in radio network. Loss of E1 datacan occur.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 59

Page 600: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 600/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

Flow Id number: is system unique and must not be repeated in radio network. Loss of E1 datacan occur.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 60

Page 601: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 601/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 61

Page 602: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 602/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 62

Page 603: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 603/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 63

Page 604: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 604/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 64

Page 605: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 605/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Flow ID number is system unique and must not be repeated in radio network. Loss of STM-1 datacan occur.

• J0 byte is only read, no Regeneration section Termination is done.

•  Auto LASER Shutdown - This field will appear only if the Settings tab-panel of the STM-1 unit theoptical SFP has been selected.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 65

Page 606: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 606/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 66

Page 607: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 607/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

[2] Put a check mark in the Port Status box to enable the STM-1.

[3] Set the Auto Laser Shutdown: Enabled/Disabled ForcedOn/Disabled ForcedOff. This field will

appear only if the Settings tab-panel of the STM-1 unit the optical SFP has been selected.

[4] Select the Clock Source.

[5] Enable the J0, if required, by selecting one of the two modes(SixteenBytesFrame/OneRepeated

Byte) in the Expected Receiving Value field and enter the expected value and in theSending J0

field select one of the two modes and enter the value to be transmitted. Note: byte J0 is onlyread,

no Regeneration section Termination is done.

[6] Click  Apply.

[7] Enable, if required, the E1 Node Timing Configuration. The Node Timing is the timingfrom the network clock as defined in G.8261. The enabling of the Node Timing is applied to allE1s of the unit. By enabling the Node Timing the E1 streams in Rx side are retimed at theoutput with the network element clock.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 67

Page 608: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 608/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

[8] Configure all the E1s to be mapped/demapped in the STM-1. The E1s are identified by aprogressive number from #1 to #63, but also by the standard SDH identification (x-y-z).

The E1 tab-panel performs all available functions for the tributary.

[9] Select Settings.

[10] Signal Mode:The possible values are:

zUnframed for the unframed received signal

zFramed for the collection of the performances at the input in Tx side and at the outputin Rx side

zDisabled

[11] Click  Apply.

[12] Service Profile:The possible profiles are:

zTDM2TDM

zTDM2Eth

[13] Flow Id: To implement cross-connections between line side and radio side each E1 tributarymust be associated to an identifier. Enter the Flow identifier value in the relevant field (possiblevalues: 2 to 4080) and press Apply.

[14] Fields ECID Tx, ECID Rx, Payload Size and TDM Clock Source can be written only if theService Profile is TDM2Eth.Note: The service profile must be the same for all the E1s.

[15] Alarm profile: Not implemented now.

[16] Click  Apply.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 68

Page 609: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 609/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 69

Page 610: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 610/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

If the electrical Ethernet port has to be used as Synchronous Source, the Ethernet port must be setas Synch-E Slave.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 70

Page 611: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 611/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 71

Page 612: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 612/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• C-VLAN Translation - supported on user Ethernet interfaces, the translation is applied bi-directional. Tagged ingress frames entering the User Ethernet interface, C-VLAN ID (From), arechanged to a new C-VLAN ID (To). At the same time, tagged egress frames, C-VLAN ID (To) arechanged to C-VLAN ID (From) exiting the User Ethernet interface.

• Port Based Rate Limiting - supported on user Ethernet interfaces. Port based Rate Limitingallows a user to provision on a per user Ethernet port basis the maximum data rate on ingressand egress directions.

• CIR can be configured in the range from 64 Kbit/s to 1,000,000 Kbit/s at step of 64 Kbit/s.

• CBS (Committed Burst Size) can be configured in the range from 4 Kbytes (4096 bytes) to

16 MBytes at step of 4 Kbytes.• Default value for CIR is 64 Kbit/s, default value for CBS is 12 Kbytes.

• Storm Control (Broadcast, Multicast, and unknown Unicast) - Storm Control provides amechanism to control the effects of broadcast, multicast, and unknown unicast storms on physicaluser Ethernet interfaces. This helps prevent traffic storms from being disruptive anddegrading network performance. The frame rate threshold can be configured in the range from 1Frame to 16.777.215 Frames for all. Default is 100 Frame/s for all.

•  VLAN Rate Limiter - Used on Ethernet interfaces for the ingress direction. VLAN based RateLimiter allows a user to provision, on a per VLAN ID basis, the maximum data rate for the ingressdirection

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 72

Page 613: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 613/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 73

Page 614: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 614/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 74

Page 615: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 615/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 75

Page 616: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 616/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 76

Page 617: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 617/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 77

Page 618: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 618/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 78

Page 619: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 619/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Per-VLAN-Per-CoS Rate limiter Parameters

• Ingress CIR (Committed Information Rate) - Ethernet throughput not taking into accountPreamble and IFG frames. Range is from 0 Kbit/s to 1 Gbit/s in steps of 64 Kbit/s. Default valuefor CIR is 64 Kbit/s. A value of 0 Kbit/s indicates a drop of the Ethernet flow.

• Ingress CBS (Committed Burst Size) - CBS is configured in the range from 4 Kbytes (4096bytes) to 16 MBytes. Default value for CBS is 16 Kbytes. The allowed values for CBS are: 4Kbytes, 8 Kbytes, 16 Kbytes, 32 Kbytes, 64 Kbytes, 128 Kbytes, 256 Kbytes, 512 Kbytes, 1Mbytes, 2 Mbytes, 4 Mbytes, 8 Mbytes. 16 Mbytes.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 79

Page 620: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 620/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Caution: Possibility of service interruption. When a Per-VLAN Per-CoS Rate Limiter is activated inconjunction with a Port Rate Limiter, the Per-VLAN Per-CoS Rate Limiter must apply to Ethernetframes that meet the Port Rate Limiter parameters. 

Per-VLAN-Per-CoS Rate limiter Parameters

• Ingress CIR (Committed Information Rate) - Ethernet throughput not taking into accountPreamble and IFG frames. Range is from 0 Kbit/s to 1 Gbit/s in steps of 64 Kbit/s. Default valuefor CIR is 64 Kbit/s. A value of 0 Kbit/s indicates a drop of the Ethernet flow.

• Ingress CBS (Committed Burst Size) - CBS is configured in the range from 4 Kbytes (4096

bytes) to 16 MBytes. Default value for CBS is 16 Kbytes. The allowed values for CBS are: 4Kbytes, 8 Kbytes, 16 Kbytes, 32 Kbytes, 64 Kbytes, 128 Kbytes, 256 Kbytes, 512 Kbytes, 1Mbytes, 2 Mbytes, 4 Mbytes, 8 Mbytes. 16 Mbytes.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 80

Page 621: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 621/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Caution: Possibility of service interruption. When a Per-VLAN Per-CoS Rate Limiter is activated inconjunction with a Port Rate Limiter, the Per-VLAN Per-CoS Rate Limiter must apply to Ethernetframes that meet the Port Rate Limiter parameters. 

Per-VLAN-Per-CoS Rate limiter Parameters

• Ingress CIR (Committed Information Rate) - Ethernet throughput not taking into accountPreamble and IFG frames. Range is from 0 Kbit/s to 1 Gbit/s in steps of 64 Kbit/s. Default valuefor CIR is 64 Kbit/s. A value of 0 Kbit/s indicates a drop of the Ethernet flow.

• Ingress CBS (Committed Burst Size) - CBS is configured in the range from 4 Kbytes (4096

bytes) to 16 MBytes. Default value for CBS is 16 Kbytes. The allowed values for CBS are: 4Kbytes, 8 Kbytes, 16 Kbytes, 32 Kbytes, 64 Kbytes, 128 Kbytes, 256 Kbytes, 512 Kbytes, 1Mbytes, 2 Mbytes, 4 Mbytes, 8 Mbytes. 16 Mbytes.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 81

Page 622: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 622/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

This tab-panel has 2 tab-panels:

z Alarm tab-panel

zSettings tab-panel

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 82

Page 623: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 623/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The TMN In-Band feature allows the extension of the DCN over User Ethernet interfaces used tocarry user traffic.

• Two default TMN In-Band interfaces (TMN In-band #1 and #2) are supported, each having itsown IP address and subnet.

• The TMN traffic delivered In-Band is VLAN tagged and identified by a specific VLAN ID defined bythe operator in the range 2-4080.

• The delivery of TMN In-Band can be enabled on all User Ethernet interface of the Core board,both Optical and Electrical.

• The Ethernet ports involved in a LAG cannot be used as TMN In-band interface.

• If the TMN In-band interface has been configured and the traffic classifier is according to 802.1p,the priority on the TMN traffic is highest. If the traffic classifier is according to DiffServ, the

priority on the TMN traffic is low and the traffic on the other Ethernet ports must be taken inconsideration.

• If two Ethernet ports, associated to the same TMN In-band logical interface, are segregated, thetwo ports do not communicate each other, as for the normal Ethernet traffic (they have the same VLAN ID). If two Ethernet ports, configured in different TMN In-band logical interfaces, aresegregated, the two ports can communicate each other, as they have 2 different VLAN IDs).

• The OSPF and related Area ID can be enabled on a TMN In-Band interface.

• For each TMN In-Band interface the following parameters must be selected:

• IP address and subnet: default 10.0.3.2/24 for interface #1 and 10.0.4.2/24 for interface #2

• VLAN ID: default 4097 for interface #1 and interface #2

• List of User Ethernet interfaces where transmit/receive TMN In-Band traffic: default None

• OSPF enable/disable: default disabled for both interfaces• Area ID in case of OSPF protocol enabled: default 0.0.0.0

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 83

Page 624: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 624/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• If used, the TMN Ethernet must be:

• Enabled.

• Assigned an IP address with its IP mask.

• Selected the IP Routing Protocol: Static Routing or OSPF. If OSPF has been selected, assignalso the area number.

• Click on the Alarm Profile icon to open the Alarm Severity Profile menu to associate to the TMNEthernet port a specific alarm profile. Select one Alarm Profile in the Profile Name list (4 alarmprofiles are listed). Tick the Show details check box to see the severity associated to eachalarm.

• Click on Apply to activate the selections.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 84

Page 625: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 625/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• If the Ethernet Port 4 has been used as TMN port, the port 4 must be:

• Enabled.

• Assigned an IP address with its IP mask.

• Selected the IP Routing Protocol: Static Routing or OSPF. If OSPF has been selected, assignalso the area number.

• Click on Apply to activate the selections.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 85

Page 626: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 626/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 86

Page 627: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 627/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 87

Page 628: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 628/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• One designated node, the RPL Owner, is responsible to block traffic over the RPL.

• Under a ring failure condition, the RPL Owner is responsible to unblock the RPL, allowing the RPLto be used for traffic.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 88

Page 629: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 629/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 89

Page 630: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 630/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The Port can be associated only to ODU300 or MPT in 1+0. The East Port and West Port must havethe same type of ODU: ODU300 or MPT.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 90

Page 631: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 631/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 91

Page 632: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 632/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 92

Page 633: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 633/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 93

Page 634: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 634/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 94

Page 635: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 635/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 95

Page 636: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 636/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

•  All the parameters in “Runtime Parameters” Panel can be modified at run time (ERP Instanceenabled).

•  After the operator clicks on Close button, the WebEML checks VLAN Id 1 association. If VLAN Id 1is not associated to any instances, a Warning will alert the operator in order to avoid traffic (if untagged) loop.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 96

Page 637: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 637/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• In Figure is shown a simple example of an Ethernet ring.

•  VLAN Id 100 and an E1/T1 stream (with Flow Id 500) are inserted in NE1 and extracted in NE4and vice versa.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 97

Page 638: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 638/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 98

Page 639: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 639/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 99

Page 640: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 640/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• For each queue and for each radio direction the buffer size (in Bytes) can be assigned.

•  A tooltip on each field shows the current and default values of the queue size with relevantconversion in msec.

1. Double click on the relevant field and enter the new value.

2. Click on Restore to go back to the previous configuration.

3. Click on Defaults to go back to the default settings.

The Default button only shows the default values.

4. Press the Apply button to confirm the default values.5. Click on Apply to send to the NE the changes.

• For each buffer size automatically is calculated the max delay in ms.

• By buttons Copy and Paste the parameters of one Radio direction can be copied to another Radiodirection.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 100

Page 641: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 641/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 101

Page 642: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 642/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 102

Page 643: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 643/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 103

Page 644: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 644/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

When the Default values are applied (by pressing button Defaults or manually by entering in thefields the default values), check that all the values of the relevant radio directions (for each queue)are equal to the default values, otherwise a Warning message will appear, as shown in figure: forDirection 5.1, in Q3 the default value has been set, in Q4 the value is different from default, all theother queues have the default value.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 104

Page 645: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 645/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 105

Page 646: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 646/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• The classification of the Priority Code Point to a specific queue is done in 2 steps:

• first from the Priority Code Point (P#) to the FC (Forwarding Class): on the left area of thescreen;

• then from the FC (Forwarding Class) to the Egress Queue (Q#): on the right area of thescreen. This association is fixed and cannot be changed.

• Click  Apply. Then click  Yes.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 106

Page 647: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 647/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Click on Apply to send to the NE the changes.

• Click on Restore to go back to the previous configuration.

• Click on Defaults to go back to the default settings.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 107

Page 648: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 648/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• The classification of the DiffServ Code Point to a specific queue takes place in 2 steps:

• first from the DiffServ Code Point (#) to the FC (Forwarding Class): on the left area of the screen;

• then from the FC (Forwarding Class) to the Egress Queue (Q#): on the right area of the screen.This association is fixed and cannot be changed.

• Click on Apply. Then click  Yes.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 108

Page 649: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 649/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Click on Apply to send to the NE the changes.

• Click on Restore to go back to the previous configuration.

• Click on Defaults to go back to the default settings.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 109

Page 650: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 650/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Click the Table form button to open a read-only table with the current association "DiffServ toForwarding Class Mapping", as shown in the figure.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 110

Page 651: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 651/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 111

Page 652: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 652/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Warning: the other port of the MPT Access unit must be DISABLED.

• To know if an ODU is grouped in a radio LAG, letter L (followed by the number of the LAG) isplaced on the ODU icon on the Equipment view (example: L01 means that the ODU has beenassociated to Radio LAG #01).

• To know if an Ethernet user port is grouped in an Ethernet LAG, in the CORE-E domain in theEthernet Physical Interface tab-panel the Settings tab-panel of the Ethernet port grouped in aLAG is gray (no changes can be done), but it not possible to see the association of a specific UserEthernet port to a specific Ethernet LAG.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 112

Page 653: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 653/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

1. Press the Create button.

The LAG Creation window displays

2. Enter the required information for one of the following LAG types (more detail and examples onnext slide):

L1 Radio

L2 Radio

L2 Ethernet

3. Click Create.

The newly created LAG displays in the Configured LAG panel.

4. Select the already created LAG to complete the configuration process (described on followingslides.)

Note: Link Aggregation Type is used to distinguish between Radio Link Aggregation an EthernetLink Aggregation. After configuring the Link Aggregation Type, the user can change the hashingalgorithm in order to select L2 (distribution of frames based on MAC header and VLAN Tag) or L3(distribution of frames based on IP header). By default L2 hashing is selected.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 113

Page 654: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 654/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

a. ID drop-down menu - select lag ID number (1-14).

b. Name - Enter the LAG name, optional (up to 32 characters max.).

c. Type drop-down menu - select (L1 Radio, L2 Radio, or L2 Ethernet).

d. Size drop-down menu - select LAG size (for L1 Radio (1-4), for L2 Ethernet/Radio (1-8))

e. Key drop-down menu - If Type is L2 Ethernet/Radio, then select Admin Key value (1-32).

f. LACP drop-down menu - If Type is L2 Ethernet, select LACP support ( Active, Passive, orDisabled).

g. Timeout - If LACP Active or Passive, then from the Timeout field, select timeout period (Shortor Long).

h. Click Create

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 114

Page 655: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 655/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

 All of the configured ports display in the Available Ports area.

1. Filter the list according to the ODU type: MPT or MD300.

2. Select the suitable port and click on the Right Arrow button to move the selected port in the Added Ports area.

3. Select the Hash algorithm (L2 or L3).

4. Click the Enabled check box.

5. If required, enable the PPP RF channel and select the OSPF Area.

• The PPP RF channel for TMN is managed here at LAG level and not at ODU level.

• By putting the mouse on a column a tooltip will appear, giving a detail information on the field asshown in next figure.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 115

Page 656: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 656/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

 All of the configured ports display in the  Available Ports area.

1. Select the suitable port and click on the Right Arrow button to move the selected port in the  AddedPorts area.

2. Select the Hash algorithm (L2 or L3).

3. Click the Enabled check box.

4. If required, change the priority of the port in the Priority column.

5. If required, configure the VLAN in the  VLAN Configuration area. The VLAN configuration is at LAG level(not at port level). The traffic, received on the user Ethernet ports, can be untagged or tagged. Foreach port it is possible to configure:

• Acceptable Frame Type:

 Admit tagged only (only tagged frames are allowed in ingress; the untagged frames are dropped)

 Admit all (tagged and untagged frames are allowed in ingress)Default value: “Admit all”.

z Port VLAN ID: if the Acceptable Frame Type is set to “Admit all” the VLAN-ID and Priority fields (to beadded in ingress to untagged frames), must be configured. Only VLAN-ID values already defined (in the VLAN management menu) can be configured for this purpose. VLAN 1 is always removed when the frame isforwarded.

z The Priority values allowed are in the range 0 - 7.The default Port VLAN-ID and Priority values are: VLAN-ID=1; Priority=0.

Untagged frames - The untagged frames received on one user Ethernet port, configured as “Admittagged only”, are dropped.

Priority frames - The priority packets (VLAN-ID=0) received on one user Ethernet port, configured as

 “Admit tagged only”, are dropped. The priority packets (VLAN-ID=0) received on one user Ethernetport, with the “Admit all” configuration enabled, are managed as untagged frames for VLAN-ID field,while the Priority field is the same of the received packets.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 116

Page 657: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 657/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

1. Remove all the Cross-connections, Segregations, VLANs associated to the LAG, if any.

2. Remove the check on the Enabled check box in the LAG Information area (Radio LAG andEthernet LAG). For Ethernet LAG, go to Step 4.

3. For Radio LAG remove the check on the Enabled check box in the PPP RF area.

4. Remove the ports associated to the LAG: select the ports in the " Added Ports" area, press theLeft Arrow button and click  Apply.

5. Click   Apply.

6. Click  Destroy.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 117

Page 658: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 658/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 118

Page 659: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 659/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 119

Page 660: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 660/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• In the XPIC Configuration screen are shown in GREEN the MPT-HC V2 with a mask with XPIC setin the “Option” field (Allowed configurations: 1+0 or 1+1 HSB with or without AdaptiveModulation) previously configured in the Radio menu and with a suitable polarization (vertical orhorizontal) as shown in the above figure.

• To configure the double 1+1 HSB co-channel XPIC follow the following steps:

1. configure the 1+1 HSB protection between the two mate MPT-HC V2;

2. configure the XPIC on the protection radio (in the MPT-HC V2 1+1 Main view configureproperly the Option for XPIC profile).

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 120

Page 661: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 661/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 121

Page 662: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 662/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 122

Page 663: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 663/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The radio channel associated in the XPIC configuration displays in the Radio menu in the Associated Interface. 

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 123

Page 664: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 664/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 124

Page 665: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 665/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 125

Page 666: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 666/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 126

Page 667: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 667/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 127

Page 668: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 668/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

1. VLAN ID field: Enter the VLAN ID (the configurable values must be in the range 2 - 4080)

• The VLAN IDs already defined to cross-connect internal flows (i.e. TDM2TDM, TDM2ETH)cannot be used.

2. VLAN Name field: Enter the VLAN Name: a text string of up to 32 characters.

• There is no check on unambiguity name.

3. VLAN Ports field: Select the ports members of this VLAN by putting a check mark on the

relevant check box. All the user Ethernet ports and all the Radio directions can be considered.

4. Untagged Ports field: Select, among the ports belonging to this VLAN (members), theuntagged ports (in egress the VLAN will be removed from the frames). Only the user Ethernetports, enabled and disabled, are manageable. The VLAN cannot be removed from the radioports (with the exception of the VLAN 1).

• The VLAN-ID values allowed are in the range 2 - 4080. By default, for the VLAN IDs defined, allthe ports are members and the Untag flag is set to “False”, which means all the frames aretransmitted with Tag.

• Tagged frames - If one tagged packet with VLAN-ID X is received on a port which is not memberof the VLAN-ID X, the packet is dropped.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 128

Page 669: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 669/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 129

Page 670: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 670/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• If an Ethernet Ring has been created, the VLAN ID of the R-APS relevant to the ERP Instancesmust be inserted in the VLAN Configuration as shown in the figure.

• The R-APS is AUTOMATICALLY inserted in the VLAN configuration.

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 130

Page 671: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 671/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 131

Page 672: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 672/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 132

Page 673: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 673/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 1

Page 674: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 674/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.4 2012-07-01 AL University First edition

4.0 2012-09-14 AL University Updated for Release 4.0

Page 675: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 675/1149

Page 676: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 676/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 4

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 677: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 677/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 5

Page

1 Cross-Connection Creation 71.1 How to create a cross-connection 81.2 Dialog Boxes 10 2 TDM Cross-Connections 112.1 TDM Cross-Connections 122.2 PDH to Radio/MPTACC 132.3 Radio to Radio 152.4 Radio/MPTACC to Ethernet 172.5 PDH to Ethernet 202.6 Cross-Connections with TDM2Eth Profile 222.7 PDH to Radio/MPTACC 242.8 Radio to Radio 252.9 Radio/MPTACC to Ethernet 26

2.10 PDH to Ethernet 27 3 SDH Cross-Connections 293.1 SDH Cross-Connections with SDHACC 303.2 SDH to Radio/MPTACC 313.3 Radio to Radio 333.4 SDH to Radio/MPTACC 353.5 Radio to Radio 363.6 SDH Cross-Connections with SDHCHAN 373.7 SDH to Radio/MPTACC 383.8 PDH to SDH 403.9 How to modify an SDH cross-con. with SDHCHAN 423.10 SDH to Radio/MPTACC 433.11 PDH to SDH 44 

4 ATM Cross-Connections 454.1 ATM Cross-Connections 464.2 ASAP – Radio 474.3 Radio – Radio 504.4 Radio – Ethernet 534.5 ASAP – Ethernet 554.6 How to modify an ATM cross-connection 57 5 LAG-LAG Cross-Connections 635.1 Ethernet LAG - Radio LAG cross-conn. 645.2 Radio LAG - Radio LAG cross-conn. 665.3 How to modify a LAG-LAG cross-connection 68 6 Ring Cross-Connections 716.1 PDH - Ring 72

6.2 Radio – Ring 746.3 Ethernet - Ring 766.4 Pass-through 786.5 How to modify a Ring cross-connection 80 7 Ethernet Cross-Connections 857.1 Ethernet Cross-Connections 867.2 Connections Tab with Ethernet Cross-Connection 89 8 Radio Cross-Connections 918.1 Radio to Radio Cross-Connections 92 9 Port Segregation 959.1 Port Segregation 969.2 CSM-E/Core-E Ethernet Port Segregation 979.3 EAS/P8ETH Ethernet Port Segregation 98

9.4 Configuration 100

Page 678: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 678/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 6

Page

Page 679: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 679/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 7

Page 680: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 680/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

To create a cross-connection between two points:

1. Place the mouse pointer on the source slot.

2. Press the left button and, while keeping button pressed, drag the mouse to the destinationslot.

3. Release the left button.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 8

Page 681: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 681/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• If the action involves two cross-connectable slots, a dialog will appear allowing the operator to setup across-connection. Looking at figure, it is possible to see different aspects of configuration created by theoperator:

• Slot#8 PDH is cross-connected to Slot#5 radio ODU300, to Slot#4 MPTACC and to Ethernet Port#1;

• Slot#4 MPTACC is cross-connected to Ethernet Port#1;

• Slot#5 RADIO (and Slot#6 RADIO) are cross-connected to Ethernet Port#2;

• Slot#3 MPTACC is cross-connected to Slot#4 MPTACC;

• Ethernet Port#3 PDH (blue) could not accept cross-connections;

• Slot#3 and Slot#4 (green) could accept more cross-connections;

• Slot#5 and Slot#6 are in 1+1 configuration.

• Each connection line is colored according to slots types it connects (as shown in Figure):

• PDH-Radio connection: black line;

• ATM-Radio connection: orange line;

• PDH-Eth connection: blue line;

• Radio-Radio connection: red line;

• Radio-Eth connection: green line;

• These colors will be applied to the graphical area, when the operator releases the mouse button abovecross-connection destination slot.

• Colors not shown in the figure:

• ATM-Radio connection: orange line (ETSI market)

• ATM-Eth connection: magenta line (ETSI market)

• Ring connection: cyan

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 9

Page 682: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 682/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• When connecting two linkable slots through a cross-connection, a dialog will appear, close to thedestination point. This dialog contains connection information, depending on start- and end-pointof connection itself.

• Each cross-connection has different parameters and required data and information will depend onongoing cross-connecting. Dialog boxes can ask for specific Flow Ids through a set of checkboxes,a field to fill-in “external” (incoming) Flow Ids, Ethernet parameters, etc.

•  All the dialog boxes have a specific title describing the building cross-connection; this states bothslots numbers and types (Slot#8 PDH – Slot#5 RADIO in the example figure).

• The “Ok ” button will visually save the current modifications (this means that data are graphicallysaved only, not sent to the NE!)

• The “Cancel” button will graphically discard ongoing cross-connection, keeping the previousgraphical.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 10

Page 683: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 683/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 11

Page 684: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 684/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

In the types of cross-connections above Eth means "Ethernet User Port" or "Ethernet LAG" and Radio means"Radio to interface ODU300" or "Radio LAG".

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 12

Page 685: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 685/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Configuration parameters will ask to specify Flow ID number, as associated in PDH slot.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 13

Page 686: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 686/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 14

Page 687: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 687/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Configuration parameters will introduce Flow ID number, as coming from remote radio signal, anda parameter related to profile and TDM Clock Source. The operator has to fill in data to completethe cross-connection configuration. The operator can use ranges and values.

• To create in one shot several cross-connections the operator can use in the Flow Id fieldthe notation [n-m] to create all Flow IDs from n to m, both included. If the operator wants tospecify different Flow Ids grouping them without using ranges, commas can used to separatevalues.

• For example:

• by entering in the FlowId field 10-15 in one shot will be created all the cross connections fromFlowId 10 to FlowId 15 (10 and 15 included);

• by entering in the FlowId field 10, 200, 250 in one shot will be created the cross connectionswith FlowId 10, FlowId 200 and FlowId 250.

• It is not possible to merge the two solutions (ranges and values) by writing [n-m],[a-b], ... and soon. Based on used input style (ranges or values), the operator will see two different confirmationdialogs.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 15

Page 688: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 688/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 16

Page 689: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 689/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 17

Page 690: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 690/1149

Page 691: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 691/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Once correctly completed the cross-connection configuration and clicked on “OK ” button, theoperator will see a green line describing the Radio/MPTACC to Ethernet cross-connection defined).

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 19

Page 692: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 692/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• By dragging a connection between a PDH slot and an Ethernet port, the operator can see theconfiguration dialog in Figure.

• To create other cross-connections drag other lines between the PDH slot and the Ethernet portand repeat the operations.

• Configuration parameters will introduce Flow ID number, as associated in PDH slot, and allparameters related to such Flow ID. The operator has to put the correct MAC address to completethe cross-connection configuration.

• Select the Flow ID number. As associated in PDH slot, the parameters related to such Flow ID areretrieved. The operator has to enter the destination MAC address to complete the cross-connection configuration and click OK.

•The Profile can be TDM2Eth or TDM2TDM.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 20

Page 693: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 693/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Once correctly completed the cross-connection configuration and clicked on “OK ” button, theoperator will be able to see a blue line describing the PDH to Ethernet cross-connection defined(see Figure).

• Considering a connection to Ethernet ports, when a port reaches its full capacity, the operator willsee a specific report.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 21

Page 694: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 694/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• In these types of cross-connections the destination MAC address of the adjacent NE (unicastaddress in case of unprotected configurations, multicast address in case of protectedconfigurations) must be inserted during the cross-connection creation.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 22

Page 695: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 695/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 23

Page 696: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 696/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

•  An existing cross-connection can be modified by double-clicking with the left mouse button on itssymbolic line.

• Now from the screen you have to delete the cross-connections by removing the check mark fromthe relevant Flow Id box and create again a new cross-connections.

• In figure the operator is modifying a previously created cross-connection (in this case Slot#8PDH and Slot#5 radio): this action brings up a dialog almost like the creation one, but withsome differences in allowed actions:

• previously assigned tributaries (400 to 405 in the example) are active and selected;

• tributaries assigned to another cross-connection (406 to 431) are not active and notselected.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 24

Page 697: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 697/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• The operator can click on a specific (red) line in order to modify connection parameters. With adouble click with the mouse on the connection line, the dialog window shown in Figure willappear.

• Remove the check mark and create again a cross-connection.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 25

Page 698: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 698/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• The operator can click on specific (green) line in order to modify connection parameters. With adouble click with the mouse on the connection line, the dialog window shown in the Figure abovecan be managed by the operator.

• Remove the check mark and create again a cross-connection.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 26

Page 699: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 699/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• The operator can click on specific (blue) line in order to modify connection parameters. With adouble click with the mouse on the connection line, the dialog window shown in Figure can bemanaged by the operator.

• Remove the check mark and create again a cross-connection.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 27

Page 700: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 700/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 28

This page intentionally left blank 

Page 701: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 701/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 29

Page 702: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 702/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 30

Page 703: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 703/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• By dragging a connection between a SDH slot and a Radio slot or MPTACC slot, the operator willsee the configuration dialog.

• The Flow ID is automatically recognized as associated to the SDH slot.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 31

Page 704: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 704/1149

Page 705: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 705/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• By dragging a connection between two different Radio slots, the operator will see theconfiguration dialog in figure.

• To create other cross-connections drag other lines between the two radio slots and repeat theoperations.

• Configuration parameters will introduce Flow ID number, as coming from remote radio signal, andthe profile. The operator has to fill in data to complete the cross-connection configuration.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 33

Page 706: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 706/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 34

Page 707: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 707/1149

Page 708: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 708/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• The operator can click on a specific (red) line in order to modify connection parameters. With adouble click with the mouse on the connection line, the dialog window shown in the Figure willappear.

• Remove the check mark and create again a cross-connection.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 36

Page 709: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 709/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 37

Page 710: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 710/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 38

Page 711: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 711/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 39

Page 712: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 712/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Select the Flow ID of the E1 in the PDH unit and the E1 of the SDH. Press the Right Arrow button.

• Note: In the SDH unit only the E1 streams enabled (Unframed), but with no associated Flow Id,can be cross-connected to a PDH unit.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 40

Page 713: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 713/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 41

Page 714: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 714/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 42

Page 715: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 715/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• In the Figure, the operator is modifying a previously created cross-connection (in this case Slot#8SDH and Slot#4 MPTACC): this action brings up a dialog almost like the creation one, but withsome differences in allowed actions:

• Deselect the Flow ID and select another Flow Id and click OK to change the cross-connection,then click  Apply.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 43

Page 716: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 716/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

Select the cross-connection on the right-side field, click on the Left Arrow button, click OK , thenclick on Apply.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 44

Page 717: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 717/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 45

Page 718: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 718/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 46

Page 719: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 719/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Enter the following Configuration parameters:

• ATM interface (this interface is the IMA group: from 1 to 8)

• PW label

• VPI

• VLAN ID

• Destination MAC Address (only with MPT-HC or MPT-MC)

• The Traffic Descriptor is automatically created.

•  ATM "Light" Cross-connection Provisioning

• In this release when a cross-connection toward a radio direction with MPT is involved, therelated provisioning is performed in almost the same way as with ODU300, with the followingmain differences:

• MAC DA is also explicitly provisioned in the NE acting as TPE role

• admission control, in terms of checking bandwidth required but ATM PW flow against theavailable bandwidth on radio interface, is never performed.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 47

Page 720: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 720/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 48

Page 721: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 721/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 49

Page 722: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 722/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• By dragging a connection between two different radio slots, the operator will see theconfiguration dialog.

• To create other cross-connections drag other lines between the two radio slots and repeat theoperations.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 50

Page 723: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 723/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Configuration parameters are:

• select the Service: ATM or PW3

• select the PW label

• assign the VLAN ID

• associate the Traffic Descriptor by clicking on Browse and selecting a Traffic Descriptorpreviously created.

•  An ATM PW is made up of two undirectional flows.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 51

Page 724: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 724/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 52

Page 725: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 725/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Configuration parameters are:

• select the Service: ATM or PW3

• select the PW label

• assign the VLAN ID

• enter the Destination MAC address

• associate the Traffic Descriptor by clicking on Browse and selecting a Traffic Descriptorpreviously created.

•  An ATM PW is made up of two undirectional flows.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 53

Page 726: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 726/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 54

Page 727: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 727/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Configuration parameters are:

• select the ATM interface

• select the PW label

• enter the VPI

• assign the VLAN ID

• enter the Destination MAC address

• The Traffic Descriptor is automatically created.

• The operator has to put the correct Destination MAC address to complete the cross-connectionconfiguration.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 55

Page 728: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 728/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

Considering a connection to Ethernet ports, when a port reaches its full capacity, the operator willsee a specific report.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 56

Page 729: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 729/1149

Page 730: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 730/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• In Figure the operator is modifying a previously created cross-connection: this action brings up adialog almost like the creation one:

• Previously assigned tributaries (111 in the example) are active and selected;

• Tributaries assigned to another cross-connection are not active and not selected.

• Select the ATM interface and remove the check mark and create again a cross-connection.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 58

Page 731: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 731/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• The operator can click on a specific (red) line in order to modify connection parameters. With adouble click with the mouse on the connection line, the dialog window shown in Figure willappear.

• Select the ATM Service and remove the check mark and create again a cross-connection.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 59

Page 732: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 732/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• The operator can click on specific (green) line in order to modify connection parameters. With adouble click with the mouse on the connection line, the dialog window shown in Figure can bemanaged by the operator.

• Select the ATM Service and remove the check mark and create again a cross-connection.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 60

Page 733: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 733/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• The operator can click on specific (blue) line in order to modify connection parameters. With adouble click with the mouse on the connection line, the dialog window shown in Figure can bemanaged by the operator.

• Select the ATM interface and remove the check mark and create again a cross-connection.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 61

Page 734: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 734/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 62

This page intentionally left blank 

Page 735: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 735/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 63

Page 736: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 736/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Configuration parameters will introduce the Service (TDM or ATM), Flow ID number and allparameters related to such Flow ID. The operator has to put the correct MAC address to completethe cross-connection configuration.

• Two types of cross-connections can be implemented:

• Ethernet LAG - Radio LAG cross-connections

• Radio LAG - Radio LAG cross-connections

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 64

Page 737: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 737/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

To create other cross-connections drag other lines between the Radio LAG and the Ethernet LAGand repeat the operations.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 65

Page 738: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 738/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Configuration parameters will introduce the Service (TDM or ATM), Flow ID number, as comingfrom remote radio signal, and a parameter related to profile and TDM Clock Source. The operatorhas to fill in data to complete the cross-connection configuration. The operator can use rangesand values.

• To create in one shot several cross-connections the operator can use in the Flow ID field thenotation [n-m] to create all Flow IDs from n to m, both included. If the operator wants to specifydifferent Flow IDs grouping them without using ranges, commas can used to separate values.

• For example:

• by entering in the FlowId field 10-15 in one shot will be created all the cross connectionsfrom FlowId 10 to FlowId 15 (10 and 15 included);

•by entering in the FlowId field 10, 200, 250 in one shot will be created the crossconnections with FlowId 10, FlowId 200 and FlowId 250.

• It is not possible to merge the two solutions (ranges and values) by writing [n-m],[a-b], ... and soon. Based on used input style (ranges or values), the operator will see two different confirmationdialogs.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 66

Page 739: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 739/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 67

Page 740: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 740/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 68

Page 741: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 741/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• In the Figure, the operator is modifying a previously created cross-connection (in this case RadioLAG #2 SDH and Ethernet LAG #24): this action brings up a dialog almost like the creation one,but with some differences in allowed actions:

• Previously assigned Flow ID (654 in the example) is active and selected;

• In the example of the figure there is no other Flow ID and for this reason it is not possible tocreate another cross-connection.

• Select the Service and the Flows ID and click OK to remove the cross-connection, then click  Apply.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 69

Page 742: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 742/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Previously assigned Flow ID (654 in the example) is active and selected;

• In the example of the figure there is no other Flow ID and for this reason it is not possible tocreate another cross-connection.

• Select the Service and the Flows ID and click OK to remove the cross-connection, then click  Apply.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 70

Page 743: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 743/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 71

Page 744: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 744/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Configuration parameters will ask to select the instance and to select Flow ID number, asassociated in PDH slot.

• The Cross-connections to be implemented are:

• PDH - Ring cross-connections

• Radio - Ring cross-connections

• Ethernet - Ring cross-connections

• Pass-through cross-connections

Warning: After the Ring cross-connection creation enable the ERP in the Ring menu (click on theRing icon in the Tool bar).

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 72

Page 745: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 745/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 73

Page 746: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 746/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Configuration parameters are the Ring Instance, VLAN (multiple selection can be done), ServiceProfile and TDM Clock Source (if the Profile in TDM2Eth).

• The operator has to fill in data to complete the cross-connection configuration and click on theRight Arrow button.

• The dialog screen displays the cross-connected VLANs (see figure).

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 74

Page 747: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 747/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 75

Page 748: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 748/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Configuration parameters are the Ring Instance, VLAN (multiple selection can be done), ServiceProfile, TDM Clock Source (if the Profile in TDM2Eth) and the destination MAC Address.

• The operator has to fill in data to complete the cross-connection configuration and click on theRight Arrow button.

• The dialog screen displays the cross-connected VLANs (see figure).

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 76

Page 749: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 749/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

When a port reaches its full capacity, the operator will see a specific report.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 77

Page 750: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 750/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Configuration parameters are the Ring Instance, VLAN (multiple selection can be done), ServiceProfile and TDM Clock Source (if the profile is TDM2Eth).

• The operator has to fill in data to complete the cross-connection configuration and click on theRight Arrow button.

• The dialog screen displays the cross-connected VLANs (see figure).

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 78

Page 751: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 751/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 79

Page 752: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 752/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 80

Page 753: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 753/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• In the Figure above, the operator is modifying a previously created cross-connection (in this caseSlot#3 PDH and Radio): this action brings up a dialog almost like the creation one, but with somedifferences in allowed actions

• Deselect the Flow Id and select another one. Click OK and Apply.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 81

Page 754: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 754/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The operator can click on a specific line in order to modify connection parameters. With a doubleclick with the mouse on the connection line, the dialog window shown in the Figure above willappear.

• Select the cross-connected VLANs in the right-side field and click on the Left Arrow arrow.Change the Instance, if required, then select another VLAN and click the Right Arrow button.Click on OK and Apply.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 82

Page 755: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 755/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The operator can click on a specific line in order to modify connection parameters. With a doubleclick with the mouse on the connection line, the dialog window shown in the Figure will appear.

• Select the cross-connected VLANs in the right-side field and click on the Left Arrow arrow.Change the Instance, if required, then select another VLAN and click the Right Arrow button.Click on OK and Apply.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 83

Page 756: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 756/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The operator can click on specific line in order to modify connection parameters. With a doubleclick with the mouse on the connection line, the dialog window shown in the Figure can bemanaged by the operator.

• Select the cross-connected VLANs in the right-side field and click on the Left Arrow arrow.Change the Instance, if required, then select another VLAN and click the Right Arrow button.Click on OK and Apply.

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 84

Page 757: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 757/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 85

Page 758: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 758/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 86

Notes:

Remember Flow Id must be the same on both ends of the path and only used once in the network.

Page 759: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 759/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 87

Notes:

Ethernet Flow IDs

• For multiple Flow IDs:

• List each Flow ID separately, with a comma separator (56, 57, 60, 70)

• List an inclusive range of Flow IDs (56-65, 70, 72)

Page 760: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 760/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 88

Notes:

Ethernet to Radio Cross-Connections

1. Select Ethernet port and drag and draw line to Radio port. RADIO-ETH pop-up displays.

2. On the RADIO-ETH pop-up, enter Flow ID number in the Flow ID field.

3. Enter the destination MAC address where the DS1 will be terminated in the MAC Address field.

4. On the RADIO-ETH pop-up, click OK .

5. On the Cross-Connection screen, click  Apply.

Page 761: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 761/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 89

Page 762: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 762/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 90

This page intentionally left blank 

Page 763: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 763/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 91

Page 764: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 764/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 92

Notes:

Radio to Radio Cross-Connections

1. Select Radio port and drag and draw line to Radio port. RADIO-RADIO pop-up displays.

2. On the RADIO-RADIO pop-up, enter Flow ID number in the Flow Id field (flow ID must be thesame through the entire path).

3. On the RADIO-RADIO pop-up, click OK.

4. On the Cross-Connections screen, click  Apply.

Page 765: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 765/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 93

Page 766: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 766/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 94

This page intentionally left blank 

Page 767: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 767/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 95

Page 768: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 768/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 96

Page 769: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 769/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 97

Notes: 

• When provisioning multiple radio links on the same path use port segregation to avoid any Ethernetloops.

• Double-click on the provisioned port. Uncheck all ports to be segregated. Select OK then Apply.

• This option sets the segregation state to exclude the port from exchanging frames with a given list of ports.

• In this way a segregated port can exchange frames only with a non-segregated port.

• Port segregation is used to:

• save bandwidth (prevent collisions and broadcasts)

• save resources on the node and on the ports

• improve the security and the privacy of the transmission

Page 770: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 770/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 98

Page 771: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 771/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 99

Page 772: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 772/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 100

Notes: 

• The switch ports in a private VLAN domain have special characteristics. One key characteristic is portsegregation within an isolated VLAN.

• Isolated or segregated ports are typically used for those endpoints that only require access to a limitednumber of outgoing interfaces.

•  An endpoint connected to an isolated port will only possess the ability to communicate with thoseendpoints connected to provisioned ports.

• Endpoints connected to adjacent isolated ports cannot communicate with one another.

•If you attempt to setup a cross-connection between ports that have been segregated, you will get awarning that the port is segregated.

• Press Alt-W. Notice the screens are different if any ports are segregated.

Page 773: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 773/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 101

This page intentionally left blank 

Page 774: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 774/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 102

Page 775: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 775/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 1

Page 776: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 776/1149

Page 777: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 777/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 3

Page 778: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 778/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 4

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 779: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 779/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 5

Page

1 WT Performance Monitoring Suite 71.1 Introduction 81.2 Tool bar 111.3 Menu bar 131.4 NE Measurement Main Tree 151.5 How to Start the Measurements 211.6 How to Stop the Measurements 221.7 Offline Mode 231.8 PM selectable options 26 2 Ethernet Statistics 272.1 Ethernet Statistics tab 282.2 CORE-ENH unit Ethernet Statistics 292.3 Radio QoS Ethernet Port PM example 40 

3 RADIO PMs 413.1 RADIO PMs procedures 423.2 Manage thresholds 443.3 24-Hour Current List View example 483.4 24-Hour Current Overview example 493.5 24-Hour Current Birdseye View example 503.6 Radio Port PM example 51 4 Adaptive Modulation PM 534.1 Performance monitoring procedures 544.2 Adaptive Modulation PM example 56 5 PDH Performance Monitoring 575.1 P32E1DS1 unit performances 585.2 Incoming 59

5.3 How to display a threshold 605.4 Example of the other views 62 6 IMA Layer Statistics 656.1 IMA Layer Statistics 66 7 ATM Layer Statistics 697.1 ATM Interface Statistics 707.2 Interface# 717.3 Logical VPs and Not Logical VPs 72 8 RSL History 758.1 RSL History 76

Page 780: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 780/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 6

Page

Page 781: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 781/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 7

Page 782: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 782/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The WT Performance Monitoring Suite can be invoked:

• from NEtO by clicking on the WTPMS (WT Performance Monitoring Suite) button

• from the WebEML by clicking the WTPMS (WT Performance Monitoring Suite) icon in the ToolBar

• from the WebEML in Main menu > Diagnosis > Performance Monitoring

• from the WebEML in Main menu > Diagnosis > Summary Block Diagram View 

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 8

Page 783: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 783/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 9

Page 784: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 784/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 10

Page 785: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 785/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The buttons in the Toolbar have the following functionalities:

• Close button removes a NE from the NE list;

• Move to front button (not available);

• Move to back button (not available);

• Sort button (not available);

• Background button (not available);

• Start/Stop button starts or stops the counters for the data collection, when the Current Datahave been stopped or started. The current measurement status is shown;

• Refresh button retrieves the current PM reports form NE and update the table view and chartview with the recently collected data;

• Reset button resets the data collection and related counters;

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 11

Page 786: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 786/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

•  Archive button archives in the NM environment the PDH PM and the Radio PM (only theradio counters);

• Collect button forces in the NM environment the PM collection;

• Export button saves the report;

• Print button prints the user selected performance point;

• Offline Mode button saves the current status of the WT Performance Monitoring Suite tohave later the possibility to see the PM offline;

• List View to display all the PM counters in a tabular format;

• Overview button to display all the PM counters in a graphic format;

Bird's Eye View button displays a selected PM counter in a graphic• format with the possibility to zoom in/out and autorange the graphic and to navigate in the

graphic;

• Note button shows the meaning of each parameter;

• Help button show help content.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 12

Page 787: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 787/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• File: ExportPrintOffline modeExit: closes the application

• Edit: (this menu is available only in NM environment). Threshold Editor (opensthe Editor for the thresholds to be associated in the PDH PM feature baror in the Radio PM feature bar)

• Network : List View

OverviewBird’s Eye View 

• Action: Move to front (not available)Move to back (not available)Sort (not available)Background (not available)Close: removes a NE from the NE list

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 13

Page 788: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 788/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Tools:

• Start/Stop: starts or stops the counters for the data collection, when the Current Data have

been stopped or started

• Reset: resets the data collection and related counters

• Refresh: retrieves the current PM reports form NE and update the table view and chart viewwith the recently collected data Archive (this option is available only in NM environment):archives in the NM environment the PDH PM and the Radio PM (only the radio counters)

• Windows: shows the list of the open windows

• Help: shows some information on the Help

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 14

Page 789: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 789/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• In the List View all the available counters for a selected feature, slot, measurement point are shown in the tabularformat. In the List View the Custom View tab-panel enabes the display of a subset of the available counters.

• You can customize the view by clicking on tab Custom View.

• The view is divided into two areas:

• left area, which contains the list of the selectable counters;

• right area, which contains the list of the selected counters.

• The user can select a counter on the left area and by clicking the upper arrow move it to the right area in order tocustomize the counter view. The opposite operation can be done by selecting the counter in the right area and byclicking the lower arrow to move it to the left area. Click on OK button to confirm.

• In the Overview all the measurements are shown in a small graphic format in one screen.

• In the Bird’s Eye View the measurements are shown in graphic format one by one.

• By using the navigation bar in the upper part of the screen a specific port or a specific counter can be displayed.

• By default all the measurements, selected through the navigation bars, are displayed, but by deselecting the check box of a particular measurement counter on the legend, the relevant counter is removed from the view.

• In the lower part of the screen the Default counters and the Elaborated Counters are shown in a tabular format.

• Default Counters: collected on the NE

• Elaborated Counters: processed on the PC and available only when the PC is connected to the NE.

• By right clicking with the mouse on the graphic the following options will appear:

• Copy: to storage the image

• Save as: to save the image as .png or .jpeg

• Print: to print the image

• Zoom In: to enlarge the image

• Zoom Out: to shrink the image

•  AutoRange: to fit the image

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 15

Page 790: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 790/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 16

Page 791: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 791/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 17

Page 792: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 792/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 18

Page 793: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 793/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• The Custom View Composer (launched from the Custom View tab) allows the user to specifywhich PM fields are displayed in the List View and the Overview for the respective PMcategories:

• Ethernet Statistics

• Radio PM

•  Adaptive Modulation PM

• PDH MP

• IMA Layer Statistics (ETSI)

•  ATM Interface Statistics (ETSI)

RSL Statistics

• To change the field display:

1. Click the Custom View tab (see next slide)

2. From the Custom View Composer, Not Selected panel, select the fields to be displayed.

3. Click the right arrow to move the fields into the Selected panel.

4. Click  OK .

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 19

Page 794: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 794/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 20

Page 795: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 795/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• (1) In the example shown, Ethernet Statistics has been selected.

• (2) The slot selection corresponds to the selection of the unit. In the figure, Slot 1 has beenselected. The selection of the unit will cause the display of the counters of all its availablesubordinate objects, i.e. in this example the counters of all equipped ports will be displayed.

• (3) Optionally, after the selection of the slot, you can select one of its subordinate objects. In thiscase, only the selected object is highlighted in the frame area.

• The PM can be started individually or at slot level.

• (4) The start time is displayed in the Configuration area (left-lower part of the window).

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 21

Page 796: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 796/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 22

Page 797: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 797/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 23

Page 798: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 798/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 24

Page 799: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 799/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

The Toolbar and the Menu bar are the same bars of the WTPMS. The only differences are:

zStart/Stop and Refresh buttons are not available in the Offline Mode

z allows to open another NE in offline mode.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 25

Page 800: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 800/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Several tab-panels can be present:

• A - NEs List: it includes all the NEs, which launched the application

• B - Specific tab-panel (identified by the NE IP address) for each NE, which launchedthe application.

• By clicking an NE in the NEs List or in the specific NE tab-panel, the available PM will appear.

• The following types of Performance Monitoring are available:

1. Ethernet Statistics

2. Radio PM

3.  Adaptive Modulation PM

4. PDH PM5. IMA Layer Statistics (ETSI market)

6.  ATM Interface Statistics (ETSI market)

7. RSL History

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 26

Page 801: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 801/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 27

Page 802: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 802/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Stability measurement on Ethernet counters (with duration from few hours to 24 Hours) should beperformed by selecting an high value (60 seconds) as collection time of the performances (refer toparameter Interval in the Configuration subwindow).

• The MPTACC unit is the interface to MPT-HC/MPT-MC.

• The MD300 unit is the interface to ODU300.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 28

Page 803: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 803/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The right-hand area contains the statistic data for the Ports.

• The following tab are selectable for each port:

• Ethernet Aggregate Tx

• Ethernet Aggregate Rx

• Custom view

• The default interval is 5 seconds.

• The default duration is 1 hour.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 29

Page 804: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 804/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The available performances at port level are (see Port 1 selected in the above figure):

• TTO: total number of octets of Ethernet frames transmitted out by the Interface, includingEthernet header characters.

• TTF: total number of Ethernet frames transmitted out by the interface.

• TDF: total number of Transmitted Ethernet frames, which were chosen to be discarded due tobuffer congestion.

Reserved Multicast frames are discarded, but the TDF counter is not incremented.

• TTF Unicast: total number of Ethernet Unicast frames transmitted out by the Virtual EthernetInterface.

• TTF Multicast: total number of good packets transmitted by this address that were directedto a multicast address. This number does not include packets directed to the broadcastaddress.

• TTF Broadcast: total number of good packets transmitted by this address that were directedto the broadcast address.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 30

Page 805: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 805/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• The available performances at port level (see Port 1 selected in the above figure):

• TRO: total number of octects of Ethernet frames received by the Virtual Ethernet Interface,including Ethernet header characters.

• TRF: total number of Ethernet frames received by the Virtual Ethernet Interface.

• TRSEF: total number of errored frames.

• TDF: total number of Ethernet frames discarded for congestion.

N.B.: Reserved Multicast frames are discarded, but the TDF counter is not incremented.

• TRF Unicast: total number of Ethernet Unicast frames received correctly by the VirtualEthernet Interface.

TRF Multicast: total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicastaddress. This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.

• TRF Broadcast: total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcastaddress. This number does not include multicast packets.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 31

Page 806: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 806/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Click on the Navigation bar to change the view.

• In the buttom 2 tab-panels show the counters:

• Deafult Counters: collected on the NE row

• Elaborated Counters: processed on the PC and are available only when the PC is connectedto the NE.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 32

Page 807: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 807/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Click on the Navigation bar to change the view.

• In the buttom 2 tab-panels show the counters:

• Deafult Counters: collected on the NE row

• Elaborated Counters: processed on the PC and are available only when the PC is connectedto the NE.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 33

Page 808: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 808/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Figure 1 above shows examples of selection of an MPTACC unit:

• MPTACC in slot #3 refers to a 1+1 configuration

• MPTACC in slot #4 refers to a 1+0 configuration

• MPTACC in slot #5 refers to a non 1+1 configuration

• Figure 2 above shows examples of selection of a P8ETh unit:

• P8ETH in slot#3 refers to a 1+1 configuration (port #5)

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 34

Page 809: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 809/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Two types of MPT are available:

• MPT-HC (High Capacity), up to 256QAM

• MPT-HC (Medium Capacity), up to 128QAM

• The MPTACC unit has 8 output queues:

• Queue 8 is reserved to TDM2TDM traffic.

• Queue 7 is reserved to TDM2Eth traffic.

• Queue 6 is reserved to TMN traffic.

• The remaining 5 queues are reserved to Ethernet traffic. Queue 5 is the highest priority queue.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 35

Page 810: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 810/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Select the tab of the queue to display. The available performances at queue level (for eachqueue) are:

• TTO: total number of octets of Ethernet frames transmitted out by the Interface, includingEthernet header characters.

• TTF: total number of Ethernet frames transmitted out by the interface.

• TDF: total number of Transmitted Ethernet frames which were chosen to be discarded due tobuffer congestion.

• Reserved Multicast frames are discarded, but the TDF counter is not incremented.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 36

Page 811: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 811/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Click on the Navigation bar to change the view.

• In the buttom 2 tab-panels show the counters:

• Default Counters: collected on the NE row

• Elaborated Counters: processed on the PC and are available only when the PC isconnected to the NE.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 37

Page 812: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 812/1149

Page 813: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 813/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Click on the Navigation bar to change the view.

• In the buttom 2 tab-panels show the counters:

• Default Counters: collected on the NE row

• Elaborated Counters: processed on the PC and are available only when the PC isconnected to the NE.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 39

Page 814: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 814/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 40

Page 815: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 815/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 41

Page 816: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 816/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

1) The following Radio tabs are selectable:

• Hop Ch 0 (Spare channel)

• Hop Ch 1 (Main channel)

• Link (RPS active channel)

• Use the Menu bar the or click the relevant icon in the Tool bar to display the other views,

• The performance reports can be displayed in 15 minutes or 24 hour time periods. The samefunctions are provided for both time periods.

• The PM are of HOP or LINK type:

• HOP refers to the PM before the RPS switch.

• LINK refers to Performance Monitoring after the RPS switch.

• Two types of counters are supported:

• Radio Counters – Errored seconds, Severely Errored Seconds, Background Block Error, andUnavailable Seconds

•  Analog Counters – minimum, average, and maximum power levels during the elasped time.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 42

Page 817: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 817/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The view contains the following collection data parameters:

• Time. It displayes the time of the Performance Monitoring. This time changes after the AutoRefresh.

• Elapsed Time. It displays the elapsed time in the current interval of monitoring.

• Suppressed Intervals. It displays the number of intervals (reports) suppressed in the Historybecause they don’t have errors. 

• If an interval is suspected, it is highlighted in red. An interval is defined as “suspect” if at leastone of the following conditions occurs in the collection period:

• the elapsed time deviates more than 10 seconds of the nominal time

• loss of the Performance Monitoring data in the equipment

• performance counters have been reset during the interval.

• The displayed counters are:

• BBE (Background block Errors)

• ES (Errored Seconds)

• SES (Severily Errored Seconds)

• UAS (Unavailable Seconds)

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 43

Page 818: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 818/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• For the ANSI market the PDH PM

• Thresholds assigned to Performance Monitoring counters can be created, displayed, or changed.

• There are threshold tables for the HOP and for the LINK.

• There are two default thresholds for HOP: Threshold #1 (for 15 min report) and Threshold#4 (for 24 hour report).

• There are two default thresholds for LINK : Threshold #1 (15 min report) and Threshold #3 

(for 24 hour report).

• The user can manage thresholds to be associated to Hop or Link 15min report or 24h report.

• The following actions can be performed:

• Thresholds display

• Create threshold

• Delete threshold

•  Associate a threshold to a monitoring point

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 44

Page 819: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 819/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Four threshold tables can be created for the HOP (Threshold #2, #3, #5 and #6).

• Two threshold tables can be created for the LINK (Threshold #2 and #4).

• Two standard thresholds are available for the HOP (Threshold #1, #4).

• Two standard thresholds are available for the LINK (Threshold #1 and #3).

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 45

Page 820: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 820/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

Only the created thresholds can be modified or deleted. The default thresholds can be onlydisplayed.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 46

Page 821: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 821/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

The list of the available thresholds for the previously selected Monitoring Point is presented byclicking on the down arrow beside the field name (threshold in this case); only the thresholdsapplicable to the selected Monitoring Point are presented.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 47

Page 822: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 822/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 48

Page 823: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 823/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 49

Page 824: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 824/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 50

Page 825: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 825/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• Radio Hop Section and Link Hop Section are defined as follows:

• Radio Hop Section-The unprotected radio channel (before RPS in 1+1 radio configurations)

• Link Hop Section-The protected radio channel (after RPS); Only supported in 1+1 radio configurations.

•  Adaptive Modulation PM captures the modulation scheme used on the Tx side when adaptive modulation isenabled. In 1+1 HSB radio configuration, the statistics are associated with the link level after RPS. AdaptiveModulation PM is not supported in 1+1 FD radio configurations.

• Defect second on a radio hop section, is a second in which an LOF or DemFail occurs.

• Defect second on a link hop section, is a second in which an LOF occurs at the link level after RPS.

• Errored Block count for a radio hop section equals the number of errored blocks.

• Errored Block count for a link hop section equals the number of link level errored blocks after RPS.

• Four PM counters are supported as follows:

• Errored Second (ES)-When a defect second is set or if there is at least one or more errored blocks.

• Severely Errored Seconds (SES)-When a defect second is set and if the errored block count is greater orequal to 30% of the blocks in one second.

• Background Block Error (BBE)-The number of block errors in a one second period and the second is not anSES.

• Unavailable Seconds (UAS)-A time period starting after ten consecutive SES events are detected. Thequalifying ten consecutive SES seconds are included in the UAS time period. Ending upon the detection of ten consecutive non SES events. These non SES seconds are not included in the UAS time period.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 51

Page 826: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 826/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 52

Page 827: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 827/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 53

Page 828: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 828/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The Counters can be displayed in three different views:

• List View

• Overview

• Bird's Eye View

• If the Adaptive Modulation has been enabled in the MOD300 (unit for ODU300) or in the MPTACCunit (for MPT), the WT Performance Monitoring Suite will display Adaptive Modulationperformance information.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 54

Page 829: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 829/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• The view contains the following collection data parameters:

• Time. It displayes the time of the Performance Monitoring. This time changes after the AutoRefresh.

• Elapsed Time. It displays the elapsed time in the current interval of monitoring.

• Modulation schemes (from QPSK to 256 QAM). It shows (for each modulation scheme) thetime during which a specific modulation scheme has been used.

• If an interval is suspected, it is highlighted in red. An interval is defined as "suspect" if at leastone of the following conditions occurs in the collection period:

• the elapsed time deviates more than 10 seconds of the nominal time

• loss of the Performance Monitoring data in the equipment

• performance counters have been reset during the interval.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 55

Page 830: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 830/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

•  Adaptive Modulation PM captures the modulation scheme used for the transmitter when adaptivemodulation is enabled. In 1+1 HSB radio configuration, the statistics are associated with the link level after Radio Protection Switching.

•  Adaptive Modulation PM is not supported in 1+1 FD radio configurations.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 56

Page 831: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 831/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 57

Page 832: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 832/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

•The following description explains the functions to provide the Performance Monitoring processwith a granularity period of 15 min. The same functions are provided for 24h PerformanceMonitoring process.

• The following tabs are selectable:

• Incoming

• Outgoing

• Customer View 

• By selecting the unit slot all the PM of the enabled E1s can be started in "one-shot".

• 9500MPR is transparent regarding the E1 stream. The CRC is used to detect the quality of the E1stream.

• For a better quality in the Performance Monitoring it is recommended to start up to 128 E1 PMcounters on the same NE. This means 4 counters (Incoming 15 Minutes, Incoming 24 hours,Outgoing 15 Minutes and Outgoing 24 Hours) for 32 E1 streams. The Counters can be displayedin three different views:

• List View

• Overview

• Bird’s Eye View 

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 58

Page 833: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 833/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• If an interval is suspected, it is highlighted in red. An interval is defined as “Suspect” if at leastone of the following conditions occurs in the collection period:

• the elapsed time deviates more than 10 seconds of the nominal time

• loss of the Performance Monitoring data in the equipment

• performance counters have been reset during the interval.

• These values refer to the last refresh performed with the Refresh button in the Tool bar.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 59

Page 834: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 834/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Threshold management describes how to display or change or create the threshold to be assignedto Performance Monitoring counters. There are two default threshold:

• Threshold #1, to be associated to 15 min report;

• Threshold #4, to be associated to 24 h report.

• The following actions can be done:

• Display a threshold;

• Create a threshold;

• Modify/delete a threshold;

• Associate a threshold to a monitoring point.

• The threshold management procedures for PDH are the same as previously described for RadioPM.

• There are two default threshold:

• Threshold #1 (to be associated to 15 min report)

• Threshold #4 (to be associated to 24 h report).

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 60

Page 835: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 835/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 61

Page 836: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 836/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Click on the Navigation bar to change the view.

• In the buttom 2 tab-panels show the counters:

• Deafult Counters: collected on the NE row

• Elaborated Counters: processed on the PC and are available only when the PC is connectedto the NE.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 62

Page 837: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 837/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• Click on the Navigation bar to change the view.

• In the buttom 2 tab-panels show the counters:

• Deafult Counters: collected on the NE row

• Elaborated Counters: processed on the PC and are available only when the PC is connectedto the NE.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 63

Page 838: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 838/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 64

Page 839: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 839/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 65

Page 840: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 840/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes:

• The IMA Layer Statistics are available with the A16E1DS1 unit.

• Unavail Secs: counter of the seconds where the IMA group traffic state machine is down.

• NeNumFailures: counter of the number of times a failure alarm condition (Config-Aborted,Insufficient-Links, Config-Aborted-FE, Insufficient-Links-FE, Blocked-FE) has been reported forNear-End IMA Group.

• By selecting the slot, no tables will appear.

• The quality of IMA Group and Links is evaluated by monitoring IMA Group and Link Counters.

• This monitoring is based on IMA standard.

• The Counters can be displayed in three different modalities:

• List View

• Overview

• Bird’s Eye View 

• In the following example, only the List View is shown. To display the other views select in theMenu bar the view or click the view on the relevant icon in the Tool bar.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 66

Page 841: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 841/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• For each active IMA link , belonging to an activated IMA Group, the following counters areavailable:

• IMA Violation: counter of errored, invalid or missing ICP cells, except during SES-IMA orUAS-IMA conditions;

• OIF (Out of IMA Frame) anomalies: counter of OIF anomalies, except during SES-IMA orUAS-IMA conditions;

• NeSES (Severly Errored Seconds): counter of one second intervals containing more then30% of the ICP cells counted as “IMA Violation”, or one or more link defects (e.g., LOS,OOF/LOF, AIS, or LCD), LIF defects, or LODS defects, except during UAS-IMA condition, forNear-End side;

•NeUAS (UnAvailable Seconds): counter of the seconds unavailability beginning at the onsetof 10 contiguous SES-IMA and ends at the onset of 10 contiguous seconds with no SES-IMA,for Near-End side;

• Ne Tx UUS (UnUsable Seconds): counter of unusable seconds declared by the Link StateMachine at TX and RX directions for Near-End side;

• Ne Tx failure: counter of the number of times a failure alarm condition has been entered onthis link at Tx direction for Near-End side;

• Ne Rx failure: counter of the number of times a failure alarm condition has been entered onthis link at Rx direction for Near-End side.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 67

Page 842: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 842/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 68

Page 843: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 843/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 69

Page 844: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 844/1149

Page 845: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 845/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• For each configured and active ATM interface the following counters are available:

• Received Cells: counter of the number of cells received on the ATM interface.

• Transmitted Cells: counter of the number of cells transmitted on the ATM interface.

• Inv Header Discarded Cells: counter of the number of cells discarded because of InvalidHeader, invalid VPI or invalid VCI.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 71

Page 846: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 846/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 72

Page 847: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 847/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Notes: 

• For each active VP, if configured as Termination end-point, and active VC configured over anactive ATM interface, the following counters are available:

• Discarded Cells: counter of the total number of valid VP/VC cells discarded by the trafficpolicing entity. This includes cells originally received with CLP=0 and CLP=1.

• Discarded CLP0 Cells: counter of the total number of valid VP/VC cells received with CLP=0and discarded by the traffic policing entity.

• Tagged Cells: counter of the total number of valid VP/VC cells tagged by the traffic policingentity from CLP=0 to CLP=1 and transmitted.

• Usage Rx: counter of the total number of valid VP/VC cells received including both CLP=0 andCLP=1 cells. The cells are counted prior to the application of the traffic policing.

• Usage Tx: counter of the total number of valid VP/VC cells transmitted including both CLP=0and CLP=1 cells. The cells are counted prior to the application of the traffic policing.

• Usage Rx CLP0: counter of the number of valid VP/VC cells received with CLP=0. The cellsare counted prior to the application of the traffic policing.

• Usage Tx CLP0: counter of the number of valid VP/VC cells transmitted with CLP=0. The cellsare counted prior to the application of the traffic policing.

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 73

Page 848: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 848/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 74

Page 849: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 849/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 75

Page 850: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 850/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 76

Page 851: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 851/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 77

Page 852: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 852/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 78

Page 853: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 853/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 79

Page 854: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 854/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2

Section 3 · Module 4 · Page 80

Page 855: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 855/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 1

Page 856: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 856/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.4 2012-07-01 AL University First edition

4.0 2012-09-14 AL University Updated for R4.0

Page 857: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 857/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 3

Page 858: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 858/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 4

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 859: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 859/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 5

Page

1 Fault Management 71.1 Troubleshooting 81.2 Before Going to Site Checklist 91.3 Troubleshooting Basics 111.4 Troubleshooting Path Problems 161.5 Troubleshooting Configuration Problems 191.6 Troubleshooting Ethernet Problems 201.7 Troubleshooting TMN Problems 221.8 Analyzing Ethernet Traffic 26 2 Failed Equipment Removal and Replacement 332.1 MSS-8/MSS-4 Card Removal and Replacement 342.2 Core-E Card Removal and Replacement 362.3 Flash Card Replacement Procedure 37

2.4 ODU300 Removal and Replacement 382.5 MPT-MC Removal and Replacement 39

Page 860: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 860/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 6

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 861: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 861/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 7

Page 862: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 862/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 8

Page 863: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 863/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

If the fault suggests a rain fade or other weather related fade condition and it matches the prevailing weatherconditions, do not take any action until the weather abates.

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 9

Page 864: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 864/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 10

Page 865: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 865/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 11

Page 866: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 866/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 12

Page 867: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 867/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 13

Page 868: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 868/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 14

Page 869: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 869/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 15

Page 870: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 870/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

 A path extends from ODU antenna port to ODU antenna port.

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 16

Page 871: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 871/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

Ultimately, a spectrum analyzer may have to be used to confirm interference, which is not an easy task giventhe need to connect directly to the antenna port, after removing the ODU.

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 17

Page 872: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 872/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 18

Page 873: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 873/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

•Configuration Not Supported: The plug-in installed is not enabled or is incorrect for the configuration.

• SW/HW Incompatible: Typically raised when new hardware is plugged into an existing MSS that hassoftware from an earlier release. To remove the alarm, compatible 9500 MPR software is required; installthe latest software.

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 19

Page 874: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 874/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

This section gives general guidance on troubleshooting problems related to the four Ethernet ports on theCore-E Card.

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 20

Page 875: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 875/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 21

Page 876: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 876/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes: 

• This section gives general guidance on troubleshooting problems related to the four Ethernet ports on theCore-E Card.

• Refer to table “Troubleshooting Ethernet Problems” on next slides for detail troubleshooting using the LEDslocally at the alarmed site.

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 22

Page 877: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 877/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• This section gives general guidance on troubleshooting problems related to the four Ethernet ports on theCore-E Card.

• Refer to table “Troubleshooting Ethernet Problems” on next slides for detail troubleshooting using the LEDslocally at the alarmed site.

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 23

Page 878: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 878/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes: 

• This section gives general guidance on troubleshooting problems related to the four Ethernet ports on theCore-E Card.

• Refer to table “Troubleshooting Ethernet Problems” on next slides for detail troubleshooting using the LEDslocally at the alarmed site.

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 24

Page 879: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 879/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes: 

• This section gives general guidance on troubleshooting problems related to the four Ethernet ports on theCore-E Card.

• Refer to table “Troubleshooting Ethernet Problems” on next slides for detail troubleshooting using the LEDslocally at the alarmed site.

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 25

Page 880: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 880/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• Enter:

• User Name: initial;

• Password: adminadmin.

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 26

Page 881: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 881/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

•  “Run command” provides the output on the web page. 

•  “Save output to file” provides the output on the web page and also saves the output on a file.  

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 27

Page 882: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 882/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 28

Page 883: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 883/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 29

Page 884: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 884/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 30

Page 885: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 885/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 31

Page 886: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 886/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 32

Page 887: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 887/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 33

Page 888: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 888/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

 All plug-in cards can be removed and installed with power applied.

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 34

Page 889: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 889/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

 All slots must be filled with a plug-in card or a blank panel. Failure to do so will comprise EMI integrity and thecooling capacity of the fan.

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 35

Page 890: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 890/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

•  Verify the replacement Core-E Card meets the following compatibility rules:

• Main Core-E Card (in slot 1) and Spare Core-E Card (in slot 2) must be the same type.

• Local and far end Core-E Cards must use the same software version, but do not have to be the sametype.

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 36

Page 891: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 891/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

First case: Core-E Protected

1. Get a spare FLASH CARD with the same sw-package release and license of the Main flash.

2. Remove the faulty FLASH CARD from the main Core-E and insert the spare one.

3. Insert the Core-E with the new FLASH CARD. 

4. The MIB (MAIN FLASH) will be automatically aligned with the MIB (SPARE FLASH).

Second case: Core-E Not Protected

1. Get a spare FLASH CARD with the same sw-package release and license.

2. Remove the faulty FLASH CARD from the main Core-E and insert the spare one.

3. Insert the Core-E with the new FLASH CARD. 

4. Carry-out the RESTORE procedure.

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 37

Page 892: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 892/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

For 1+1 configurations:

• before replacing the ODU make sure that the traffic is transmitted over the other channel. Otherwise,force with the CT the traffic onto the other channel.

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 38

Page 893: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 893/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

For 1+1 configurations:

• before replacing the ODU make sure that the traffic is transmitted over the other channel. Otherwise,force with the CT the traffic onto the other channel.

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 39

Page 894: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 894/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 40

Page 895: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 895/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 1

Page 896: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 896/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.4 2012-07-01 AL University First edition

4.0 2012-09-14 AL University Updated for Release 4.0

Page 897: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 897/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 3

Page 898: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 898/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 4

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 899: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 899/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 5

Page

1 Protections with ODU300 71.1 Protections with ODU300 81.2 RPS Switching Criteria 111.3 EPS Switching Criteria 121.4 HSB Switching Criteria 13 2 Protections with MPT-HC V2/MPT-XP 152.1 Protections with MPT-HCV2/MPT-XP 162.2 RPS Switching Criteria 202.3 EPS Switching Criteria 212.4 HSB Switching Criteria 22 3 MSS-4/MSS-8 XPIC (with MPT-HC V2 /MPT-XP only) 233.1 MSS-4/MSS-8 XPIC (with MPT-HCV2/MPT-XP only) 24 4 Protection with MPT-MC 27

4.1 Protection with MPT-MC 284.2 RPS Switching Criteria 304.3 EPS Switching Criteria 314.4 HSB Switching Criteria 32 5 Core-E protection 335.1 Core-E protection 345.2 User Ethernet interfaces protection 355.3 TMN Local Ethernet interface protection 365.4 Core-E protection 375.5 Core-E protection Switching Criteria 38 6 EPS, RPS, and HSB Management 396.1 EPS Management 406.2 RPS Management 43

6.3 HSB Protection Management 46 7 Ring Protection 497.1 ERPS operation 50 8 Fiber-Microwave Protection 558.1 Overview 568.2 Fiber-Microwave Protection Creation - Overview 608.3 Fiber-Microwave Protection Configuration 61

Page 900: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 900/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 6

Page

Page 901: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 901/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 7

Page 902: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 902/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 8

Page 903: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 903/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Legend:

• 1 RPS

• 2 EPS

• 3 HSB

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 9

Page 904: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 904/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Legend:

2 EPS

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 10

Page 905: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 905/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 11

Page 906: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 906/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 12

Page 907: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 907/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 13

Page 908: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 908/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 14

Page 909: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 909/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 15

Page 910: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 910/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 16

Page 911: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 911/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 17

Page 912: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 912/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

In the figure Ethernet port 2 of one MPT-HCV2/MPT-XP is connected to Ethernet port 2 of the second MPT-HC V2/MPT-XP. 

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 18

Page 913: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 913/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 19

Page 914: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 914/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• MPT-HCV2/MPT-XP supports a further embedded functionality called "Enhanced RPS". Enhanced RPS is aframe-based protection mechanism, aimed to reach a quick reaction time and increasing significantly thequality of the radio interface in the Rx side.

• It assumes the alignment between the 2 received radio channels and it is based on frame by frame selectionof the "best" frame between the frames received from the Main and the Spare radio channel.

• The Enhanced RPS assumes that the "classical" RPS criteria are used to give indication about the "preferred"channel, whose frame has to be selected, when the frame-based choice between the 2 streams is notpossible (e.g. due to the frame alignment error).

• The Enhanced RPS switching criterion depends on the presence of errors in the decoded LDPC word.

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 20

Page 915: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 915/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 21

Page 916: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 916/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

Where there is a cross configuration (EPS on Spare & TPS on main), HSB (TPS) will switch and align with EPSposition, if there is an inter-MPT coupling link failure. 

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 22

Page 917: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 917/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 23

Page 918: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 918/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• This function is implemented by installing the “RPS+XPIC” external module).

• The actual improvement will depend on the native discrimination provided at antenna alignment,and any reduction of this discrimination caused by atmospheric effects (fading).

• XPIC typically provides 20 dB improvement in polarization discrimination.

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 24

Page 919: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 919/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 25

Page 920: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 920/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 26

Page 921: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 921/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 27

Page 922: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 922/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 28

Page 923: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 923/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• Since there is no coupling link in the current release the TPS Operator Commands are notsupported.

• Only Operator Commands for EPS are supported.

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 29

Page 924: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 924/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes: 

• MPT-MC supports a further embedded functionality called "Enhanced RPS". Enhanced RPS is aframe-based protection mechanism, aimed to reach a quick reaction time and increasingsignificantly the quality of the radio interface in the Rx side.

• The Enhanced RPS assumes that the "classical" RPS criteria are used to give indication about the"preferred" channel, whose frame has to be selected, when the frame-based choice between the2 streams is not possible (e.g. due to the frame alignment error).

• The Enhanced RPS switching criterion depends on the presence of errors in the decoded LDPCword.

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 30

Page 925: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 925/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 31

Page 926: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 926/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 32

Page 927: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 927/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 33

Page 928: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 928/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

 All the switching criteria coming from both the Core units, are available (via back panel) to each peripheral inorder to allow to each logic to take the same decision. 

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 34

Page 929: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 929/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 35

Page 930: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 930/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 36

Page 931: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 931/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 37

Page 932: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 932/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

In case of stand-by Flash Card realignment in progress, the application SW refuses/removes a manual switchcommand.

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 38

Page 933: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 933/1149

Page 934: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 934/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 40

Page 935: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 935/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

Restoration Criteria field: the possible values are Revertive (automatic restoration allowed) ornot Revertive (automatic restoration Inhibited).

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 41

Page 936: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 936/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• The operator by the Craft Terminal can modify the state of the switch through commandsLockout, Forced and Manual. Select the suitable command and click on  Apply.

• Some commands are not supported by selected elements.

• Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation forces in service Channel 1 (defaultchannel), independently of the possible active alarms.

• Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command forces inservice Channel 0, independently of the possible active alarms.

 Automatic Switch is the normal operation condition: the position of the switch depends on thecommands generated by the logic.

• Manual has the lowest priority: it is performed only if there are no alarms that can activate anautomatic switch. It cannot be performed if Lockout or Forced commands are already activated. If this command is active, it will be removed by an incoming alarm.

Warning: All the commands are not error free.

Note: The “Forced” command for channel 1 is equivalent to the “Lockout” command for thechannel 0. In both case, the result is that the relevant channel protection path is forced to standbystatus.

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 42

Page 937: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 937/1149

Page 938: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 938/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• Restoration Criteria field: the possible values are Revertive (automatic restoration allowed) ornot Revertive (automatic restoration Inhibited).

• RPS Configuration: (this parameter can be changed only with MPT-HC/MPT-HC V2):

• Physical cable checked: the protection takes place through a physical interconnection cablebetween the two MPT-HC or the two MPT-HC V2

• Physical cable not checked: no physical interconnection cable between the two MPT-HC or thetwo MPT-HC V2

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 44

Page 939: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 939/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• The operator by the Craft Terminal can modify the state of the switch through commandsLockout, Forced and Manual. Select the suitable command and click on  Apply.

• Some commands are not supported by selected elements

• Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation forces in service Channel 1 (defaultchannel), independently of the possible active alarms.

• Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command forces inservice Channel 0, independently of the possible active alarms.

•  Automatic Switch is the normal operation condition: the position of the switch depends on thecommands generated by the logic.

• Manual has the lowest priority: it is performed only if there are no alarms that can activate anautomatic switch. It cannot be performed if Lockout or Forced commands are already activated. If this command is active, it will be removed by an incoming alarm.

Warning: All the commands are not error free.

Note: The “Forced” command for channel 1 is equivalent to the “Lockout” command for the

channel 0. In both case, the result is that the relevant channel protection path is forced to standbystatus.

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 45

Page 940: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 940/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 46

Page 941: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 941/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

Restoration Criteria field: the possible values are Revertive (automatic restoration allowed) ornot Revertive (automatic restoration Inhibited).

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 47

Page 942: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 942/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• The operator by the Craft Terminal can modify the state of the switch through commandsLockout, Forced and Manual. Select the suitable command and click on  Apply.

• Some commands are not supported by selected elements

• Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation forces in service Channel 1 (defaultchannel), independently of the possible active alarms.

• Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command forces in

service Channel 0, independently of the possible active alarms.

•  Automatic Switch is the normal operation condition: the position of the switch depends on thecommands generated by the logic.

• Manual has the lowest priority: it is performed only if there are no alarms that can activate anautomatic switch. It cannot be performed if Lockout or Forced commands are already activated. If this command is active, it will be removed by an incoming alarm.

Warning: All the commands are not error free.

Note: The “Forced” command for channel 1 is equivalent to the “Lockout” command for thechannel 0. In both case, the result is that the relevant channel protection path is forced to standbystatus.

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 48

Page 943: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 943/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 49

Page 944: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 944/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• Ethernet Ring Protection Switch (EPRS) is a protection switching mechanism is based on the Automatic Protection Switching protocol for Ethernet ring topologies (called R-APS).

• The fundamentals of this ring protection switching architecture are:

• principle of loop avoidance.

• utilization of learning, forwarding, and address table mechanisms defined in the Ethernet flowforwarding function.

• The loop avoidance in the ring is achieved by guaranteeing that, at any time, traffic may flow onall but one of the ring links. This particular link is called the Ring Protection Link (RPL).

• Under normal conditions the RPL link is blocked, i.e., not used for traffic. One designated node,the RPL Owner, is responsible to block traffic over the RPL. In the example above, the RPL owner(Node A) has the RPL connection point blocked with VLANs A, B, and C also blocked.

• Under a ring failure condition, the RPL owner is responsible to unblock the RPL, allowing the RPLto be used for traffic.

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 50

Page 945: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 945/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• In the example above, a blocked port on Node D causes VLANs A, B, and C to be blocked.

• The connection points between Radio West and Radio East are blocked to Node D and Node Crespectively.

• Under a ring failure condition, the RPL owner (Node A) is responsible for unblocking the RPL(between Node A and Radio East), allowing the RPL to be used for traffic.

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 51

Page 946: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 946/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• Two ERPS Control Processes are configured on each ring’s node. Each instance selects its ownRPL and RPL Owner. In the example above, Node A owns ERP 1 (between Radio East and Node A) and ERP 2 (between Radio West and Node A).

• The ERPS Control Process controls the forwarding function to perform the following actions:• to disable forwarding over the set of VLANs assigned to the ERPS instance corresponding to

blocked ring links;• to flush the learned MAC address table.

• Only revertive switching mechanism is supported.

• The Wait-to-Restore is managed by the RPL Owner, it is configured by the operator in 1 minutesteps between 1 and 12 minutes. The default value is 5 minutes.

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 52

Page 947: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 947/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• In the example above, a blocked port on Node D causes ERP 1 and ERP 2 and VLANs A, B, C, andD to be blocked.

• Under a ring failure condition, the RPL owner (Node A) for ERP 1 and ERP 2 is responsible forunblocking the RPLs (between Node A and Radio East and Radio West), allowing the RPLs to beused for traffic.

• In the example above, during the failure Ethernet flow was dropped by the radio QoS.

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 53

Page 948: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 948/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 54

Page 949: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 949/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 55

Page 950: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 950/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 56

Page 951: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 951/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 57

Page 952: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 952/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• Create a single Instance in the Topology created before. Since it is requested to manage theoverall traffic either over Fiber connection or over radio link, the usage of two Instances to loadbalance traffic in the Ring is not supported.

• Define one of the two NEs as RPL Owner and configure the radio interface as RPL. In no-faultcondition, this will set the Ring Port related to the radio interface in blocking, allowing the trafficto be forwarded over Ethernet optical connection. 

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 58

Page 953: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 953/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

The scenario is supported by the MPR NE using ERPS performing the following configuration:

1. Create two Topologies in the NE acting as Node, each Topology having a radio interface and anoptical User Ethernet interface as Ring Ports;

2. Create a single Instance in both the Topologies created before

3. For each Instance, define the NE acting as Node or the other NE at Tail end as RPL Owner andconfigure the radio interface as RPL. In no-fault condition, this will left Ring Port related to radiointerface in blocking, allowing the traffic to be forwarded over Ethernet optical connection.

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 59

Page 954: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 954/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 60

Page 955: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 955/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 61

Page 956: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 956/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 62

Page 957: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 957/1149

Page 958: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 958/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 64

Page 959: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 959/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

•  “Printing Format” is supported to manage in one shot multiple groups of VLAN IDs: i.e. (5-10,100-130, 150).

• The WebEML checks the following:

 – the admitted values are in [1-4080] range

 – VLAN Id is not used yet as R-APS VLAN Id in any instance

 – VLAN Id is already used in TMN In-band, but the TMN In-band working mode is disabled.

• The VLANs to be protected must be first added in menu Configuration > VLAN Configuration(802.1Q Virtual Bridge).

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 65

Page 960: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 960/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 66

Page 961: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 961/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 67

Page 962: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 962/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 68

Page 963: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 963/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 69

Page 964: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 964/1149

Page 965: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 965/1149

Page 966: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 966/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 72

Page 967: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 967/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 1

Page 968: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 968/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.4 2012-07-01 AL University First edition

4.0 2012-09-14 AL University Updated for Release 4.0

Page 969: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 969/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 3

Page 970: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 970/1149

Page 971: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 971/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 5

Page

1 MPR Node Software Download Menu 71.1 Server Access Configuration 81.2 Init Software Download 91.3 Software Status 101.4 Software Status 111.5 How to upgrade the software from an older version 13

Page 972: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 972/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 6

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 973: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 973/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 7

Page 974: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 974/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• User Id and Password are the login information to access the FTP server.

• In the Address field write the IP address of the FTP server.

• In the Port field write the port to be used and in the Root Directory field write the FTP server directoryname from which the software can be downloaded.

• By clicking on the Set Default button, the server access values will be filled in automatically with the defaultconfiguration.

• The CT is the default FTP server with the following parameters:

• User Id: anonymous

• Password: -

•  Address: local host IP address.

• Port: 21

• Root Dir: /

• The System Default can be changed by writing different values in the fields and then by clicking OK .

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 8

Page 975: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 975/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

Follow the steps to perform this procedure:

1. Click  Add to add the available software packages on the PC.

2. Browse to the directory where the NE software was installed and click Open.

3. Highlight the description file (i.e. R95M.DSC) and click Open.

4. Highlight the line and click on the Init Download button.

The Forced check box can be used to force download (i.e. the complete description file is downloaded tothe NE).

5. Click  Yes to begin the download process.

6. When the SW download starts, a screen showing the in progress operation of the download appears. Thedownload is aborted if the Abort button is pressed.

7. Click Ok .

Recommended operation: Before to start the software download it is recommended to disable the ATPC operation (if it has been enabled) and to set in RTPC mode the max.Tx power.

Warning: if the Software Download is in progress and more managers are connected to the same NE,the WebEML makes grey the Init Download button to save the NE from contemporary andconcurred downloads.

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 9

Page 976: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 976/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• This menu gives the information of the software installed in the NE.

• The following information is displayed:

• Name: software name

•  Version: software version

• Operational state: enabled or disabled

• Current status: committed or standby

• The committed status refers to the software currently in use

• With MPT-HC the Sw Status is available only after the MPT-HC software download completion.

• The equipment software is installed on the compact flash, which has two banks.

• This screen has two panels (each for one bank):

• panel 1 refers to bank 1 with the Committed software and relevant information;

• panel 2 refers to bank 2 with the Stand by software and relevant information.

• The Flash Card, which stores the NE software, contains 2 banks.

• The 2 banks can store 2 different software versions. One bank will be committed (active) and the other bank will be standby.

• The second bank appears when a new software package has been downloaded the first time.

• During download, necessary to update the software version, the download file is automatically stored in thestandby bank.

• To activate the new version first check the operational status of the standby bank.

•By selecting Forced Activation the bank to be activated is forced to restart.

• By selecting Activation the bank to be activated restarts only if the content of the two banks differ.

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 10

Page 977: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 977/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 11

Page 978: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 978/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• Click the Software Units Status button. A screen opens that displays additional information on thesoftware package.

• The following information is displayed on the screen:

• MDPAR: firmware version of the FPGA involved in the MSS/ODU communication channel

• OC_R: software on the ODU300 Controller (ODU300)

• BOMPT, FGUIN, MDPAR, FDUFF, FCERE, FDUJU, FMPVG, SWMPT, FADAM, FMSS1, PAMPT, PAMM1

•The other software packages are the FPGA softwares in the other units.

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 12

Page 979: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 979/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 13

Page 980: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 980/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 14

Page 981: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 981/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 5 · Module 1 · Page 1

Page 982: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 982/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 5 · Module 1 · Page 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.4 2012-07-01 AL University First edition

4.0 2012-09-14 AL University Updated for Release 4.0

Page 983: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 983/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 5 · Module 1 · Page 3

 A 

 AIS Alarm Indication Signal

 AMI Alternating Mark Inversion

 ANSI American National Standards Institute

 APT Active Problem Table

 ASAP Alarm Severity Assignment Profile

 ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit

 ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control

 AVC Attribute Value Change

B

BBE Background Block Error

BER Bit Error Rate

BIP Bit Interleaved Parity

C

CAS Channel Associated Signaling

CD Current Data

CES Circuit Emulation Service

CESoETH Circuit Emulation Service over Ethernet

CESoP Circuit Emulation Services over Packet

CFA Carrier Failure Alarm

CLA Common Loss Alarm

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check 

CRU Clock Reference Unit

CSM Control and Switching Module (Core module)

CSM-E Enhanced Control and Switching Module (Core module)

CT Craft Terminal

D

DC Direct Current

DL Data Link 

DS Differentiated Services

DS1 Digital Signal Level 1

DS3 Digital Signal Level 3

DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point

DWRR Deficient Waited round Robin

Page 984: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 984/1149

Page 985: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 985/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 5 · Module 1 · Page 5

H

HBER High Bit Error Ratio

HD History Data

HDB3 High Density order 3 Bipolar encoding

HET Hetero frequency

HQP High Queue Preempt

HS Hitless Switch

HSB Hot Standby HSDPA High Speed Data Packet Access HSSD Hot-Standby Space Diversity

HW Hardware

I

IDU Indoor Unit

ILM Infomodel Level Management

IM Information Model

IP Internet Protocol

ISAM Indexed Sequential Access Method

ISPB Intra Shelf Parallel Switching

IWF Interworking Function

J

JA Jitter Attenuator

JTAG Joint Test Action Group

JUSM Java User-based Security Model

L

LAN Local Area Network 

LAPD Link Access Procedure on D-channel

LBER Low Bit Error Ration

LIM Link Identifier Mismatch

LIU Line Interface Unit

LOF Loss Of Frame

LOS Loss Of Signal

Page 986: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 986/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 5 · Module 1 · Page 6

M

MAC Medium Access Control

MAU Medium Attachment Unit

MCF Message Communication Function

MCT Microwave Craft Terminal

MEF8 Metro Ethernet Forum

MEN Metro Ethernet Network 

MIB Management Information Base

MOD300 Radio Interface Module

MOD300EN Enhanced Radio Interface Module

MPR Microwave Packet Radio

MPT Microwave Packet Transport

MPT-HC Microwave Packet Transport  – High Capacity

MPT-HL Microwave Packet Transport  – High Power, Long Haul

MPT-MC Microwave Packet Transport  – Medium Capacity

MRTIE Maximum Relative Time Interval Error

MSOH Multiple Section Overhead

MSS Microwave Service Switch

MTIE Maximum Time Interval Error

MXC Microwave Cross Connect

N

NE Network Element

NEtO Network Element Overview

NMS Network Management System

NNI Network Node Interface

NRZ Not Return to Zero

NSA Not Service Affecting

NTP Network Time Protocol

Page 987: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 987/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 5 · Module 1 · Page 7

O

OC ODU Controller

ODU Outdoor Unit

ODU300 Outdoor Unit 300

OFS Out of Frame Second

OH Overhead

OMS Operations Management System

OOF Out Of Frame

OS Operation System

OSPF Open Short Path First

P

P2E3DS3 DS3 Module

P32E1DS1 DS1 Module

PDH Plesyochronous Digital Hierarchy

PDU Protocol Data Unit

PDV Packet Delay Variation

PFoE Power Feed over Ethernet

PLM Payload Mismatch

PLM Physical Level management

PM Performance Monitoring

PMMF Physical Machine Management Function

PNU Packet Node Unit

PPM Part Per Million

PPP Point-to-Point Protocol

PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet

PRBS Pseudo Random Binary Sequence

PRS Clock Primary Reference Source Clock 

PSN Packet Switched Network 

PSU Power Supply Unit

PTU Packet Transport Unit

PWE3 Pseudowire emulation edge to edge

Q

QAS Quadrature Amplitude Modulation

QoS Quality of Service

Page 988: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 988/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 5 · Module 1 · Page 8

R99 Original standard for UMTS WCDMA based network 

RAI Remote Alarm Indication

RDI Remote Defect Indication

REI Remote Error Indication

RFC Remote Frequency Control

RI Remote Inventory

RPS Radio Protection Switching

RSOH Regenerator Section Over-Head

RSL Receive Signal Level

RSSI Remote Signal Strength Indication

RTPC Remote Transmit Power Control

RTU Right To Use

RU Rack Unit

S

SA Service Affecting

SD Space Diversity

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SerDes Serializer/Deserializer

SES Severely Errored Second

SF Signal Fail

SFP Small form-factor pluggable transceiver

SGMII Serial Gigabit Media Independent Interface

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

SP Spare

SP Strict Priority

SPI Serial Peripheral Interface

SW Software

SWP Software Package

Page 989: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 989/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 5 · Module 1 · Page 9

T

TBI Ten Bit Interface

TCA Threshold Crossing Alarm

TCO Total Cost of Ownership

TD Threshold Data

TDEV Time Deviation

TDF Total Discarded Frames

TDM Time Division Multiplexed

TDM2ETH Time Division Multiplexed To Ethernet

TDM2TDM Time Division Multiplexed To Time Division Multiplexed

TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch

TMN Telecommunication Management Network 

TPS Transmit Protection Switching

TRCF Total Received Correct Frames

TRCO Total Received Correct Octets

TRSEF Total Received Service Errored Frames

TS Time Slot

TSM Transmission Systems Manager

TTF Total Transmitted Frames

TTO Total Transmitted Octets

TTP Trail Termination Point 

U

UAS UnAvailable Second

UAT UnAvailable Time

UI Unit Interval

UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System 

Page 990: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 990/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 5 · Module 1 · Page 10

 V

 VC-n Virtual Container - n

 VLAN Virtual Local Area Network 

 VMMF Virtual Machine Management Function 

W

WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access

WebEML Web Element Manager Layer

WiMAX Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access

WK Working

WRR Weighted Round Robin

WT Wireless Transmission

WTPM Wireless Transmission Performance Monitoring 

X

XPIC Cross-Polarized Interference Cancellation

 Y 

Z

ZBTSI Zero Byte Time Slot Interchange

Page 991: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 991/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

This page intentionally left blank 

Section 5 · Module 1 · Page 11

Page 992: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 992/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Section 5 · Module 1 · Page 12

Page 993: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 993/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 1

Page 994: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 994/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.4 2012-07-01 AL University First edition

4.0 2012-09-14 AL University Updated for Release 4.0

Page 995: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 995/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 3

Page 996: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 996/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 4

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 997: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 997/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 5

Page

1 Initial Configuration 71.1 General Requirements 81.2 Initial Turn-up 101.3 Enable Plug-In Cards 141.4 Provision Plug-In Cards 371.5 Provision XPIC 671.6 Provision Synchronization 681.7 Provision NTP protocol 691.8 Provision NE Time 701.9 Provision VLAN 711.10 Provision Cross-connections 721.11 Provision AUX Cross-Connections 731.12 Provision Ethernet Ring 74

1.13 Provision LAG 751.14 Provision QoS 761.15 Provision Ethernet Connectivity fault management 771.16 Provision System 781.17 Provision Local NE IP Address 831.18 Provision TMN Ethernet Port 841.19 Provision TMN Ethernet Port 851.20 Provision TMN in-band 861.21 Provision IP Static Routing 871.22 Provision OSPF Static Routing 89 2 Provisioning by Provisioning tool 912.1 Start Provisioning Tool 922.2 Provisioning Tool screens 95

2.3 Configuration Options Screen 992.4 Core-E Configuration 1002.5 E1 configuration 1032.6 STM-1 configuration 1042.7 Modem Provisioning 1062.8 MPT Access configuration (1+0) 1102.9 MPT Access Provisioning 1112.10 MPT Access configuration (prot. enabling: 1+1) 1162.11 MPT Access Prov. (without A. M.) (1+1) 1172.12 MPT Access Prov. (with A. M.) (1+1) 1192.13 Synchronization Configuration 1212.14 XPIC Configuration 1252.15 Ring Configuration 126

2.16 Cross Connections Configuration 1272.17 Segregated Port Configuration 1282.18 802.1D management 1292.19 802.1Q management 1302.20 VLAN Management 1322.21 Port VLAN Configuration 1332.22 Network Configuration 1342.23 Trusted Managers 1362.24 Typical Report Panel 137

Page 998: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 998/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 6

Page

Page 999: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 999/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 7

Page 1000: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1000/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 8

Page 1001: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1001/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 9

Page 1002: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1002/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• If it is necessary to scratch the MIB use the following procedure.

• Database scratch procedure:

1. Power off the equipment

2. Move the dip-switch 2 on the Core-E board.

3. Re-plug the Core-E board in the subrack.

4. When EC software starts, detects the switch position and starts with database scratch: all theconfiguration information will be erased (radio parameters, synch, XCONN, network, ecc). Theinformation of SWP is maintained (the stand-by and active SWP banks are not deleted).

5. It is possible to understand when the scratch procedure is over: make a “ping” towards NE withdefault IP address.

6.  After this, plug-out the Core-E board and restore the original dip-switch 2 position.

7. Re-plug the Core-E board.

•  Average time necessary to scratch the database (from SW start): 6-7 minutes.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 10

Page 1003: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1003/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 11

Page 1004: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1004/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• Profile Types – there are four user profiles defined.

•  Administrator (full access also for NMS local system security parameters).

• CraftPerson: person in charge for installation and the mantenance at radio site; full access to NEbut not for security parameters, only for own password.

• Operator (person in charge to operate at the network level, not at the radio side).

•  Viewer (view screens only).

• Default User Accounts – at the NE installation time, two default user accounts are created on NE

independently from the SNMP operating mode.

• Profile: administrator

• Username: initial

• Password: adminadmin

• Profile: craftPerson

• Username: Craftperson

• Password: craftcraft

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 12

Page 1005: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1005/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• Changes to provisioning do not have to be made in any particular order.

• See the figure for the recommended sequence.

• Warning: If from this NE remote NEs have to be reached, remember to configure properly theRouting Protocol of the PPP RF channel, if the remote NE is connected through the radio link or of the NMS Ethernet Port, if the remote NE is connected through the Ethernet cable.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 13

Page 1006: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1006/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 14

Page 1007: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1007/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 15

Page 1008: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1008/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 16

Page 1009: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1009/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 17

Page 1010: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1010/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 18

Page 1011: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1011/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

This operation must be done to enable the EPS protection.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 19

Page 1012: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1012/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 20

Page 1013: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1013/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 21

Page 1014: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1014/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 22

Page 1015: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1015/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 23

Page 1016: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1016/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 24

Page 1017: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1017/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

ODU is automatically enabled when Modem Card is enabled.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 25

Page 1018: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1018/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

zODU is automatically enabled when Modem Card is enabled.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 26

Page 1019: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1019/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

This operation must be done to enable the protection: 1+1 FD or 1+1 HSB.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 27

Page 1020: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1020/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 28

Page 1021: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1021/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

Two unprotected or protected MPT-HC or MPT-MC can be connected to one MPT Access unit.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 29

Page 1022: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1022/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 30

Page 1023: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1023/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 31

Page 1024: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1024/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

This operation must be done to enable the protection: 1+1 FD or 1+1 HSB.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 32

Page 1025: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1025/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 33

Page 1026: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1026/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 34

Page 1027: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1027/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 35

Page 1028: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1028/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 36

Page 1029: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1029/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 37

Page 1030: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1030/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• (8): If the electrical Ethernet port has to be used as Synchronous Source, the Ethernet port mustbe set as Synch-E Slave.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 38

Page 1031: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1031/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 39

Page 1032: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1032/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• (7): If the electrical Ethernet port has to be used as Synchronous Source, the Ethernet port mustbe set as Synch-E Slave.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 40

Page 1033: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1033/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 41

Page 1034: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1034/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

Flow Id number: is system unique and must not be repeated in radio network. Loss of E1 datacan occur.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 42

Page 1035: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1035/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

Flow Id number: is system unique and must not be repeated in radio network. Loss of E1 datacan occur.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 43

Page 1036: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1036/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 44

Page 1037: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1037/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 45

Page 1038: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1038/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

Flow ID number is system unique and must not be repeated in radio network. Loss of STM-1 datacan occur.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 46

Page 1039: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1039/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 47

Page 1040: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1040/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

[2] Put a check mark in the Port Status box to enable the STM-1.

[3] Set the Auto Laser Shutdown: Enabled/Disabled ForcedOn/Disabled ForcedOff. This field will

appear only if the Settings tab-panel of the STM-1 unit the optical SFP has been selected.

[4] Select the Clock Source.

[5] Enable the J0, if required, by selecting one of the two modes(SixteenBytesFrame/OneRepeated

Byte) in the Expected Receiving Value field and enter the expected value and in theSending J0

field select one of the two modes and enter the value to be transmitted. Note: byte J0 is onlyread,

no Regeneration section Termination is done.

[6] Click  Apply.

[7] Enable, if required, the E1 Node Timing Configuration. The Node Timing is the timingfrom the

network clock as defined in G.8261. The enabling of the Node Timing is applied to all E1s of the unit.

By enabling the Node Timing the E1 streams in Rx side are retimed at the output with thenetwork 

element clock.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 48

Page 1041: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1041/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

[8] Configure all the E1s to be mapped/demapped in the STM-1. The E1s are identified by aprogressive number from #1 to #63, but also by the standard SDH identification (x-y-z).

The E1 tab-panel performs all available functions for the tributary.

[9] Select Settings.

[10] Signal Mode:The possible values are:

zUnframed for the unframed received signal

zFramed for the collection of the performances at the input in Tx side and at the outputin Rx side

zDisabled

[11] Click  Apply.

[12] Service Profile:The possible profiles are:

zTDM2TDM

zTDM2Eth

[13] Flow Id: To implement cross-connections between line side and radio side each E1 tributarymust be associated to an identifier. Enter the Flow identifier value in the relevant field (possiblevalues: 2 to 4080) and press Apply.

[14] Fields ECID Tx, ECID Rx, Payload Size and TDM Clock Source can be written only if theService Profile is TDM2Eth.Note: The service profile must be the same for all the E1s.

[15] Alarm profile: Not implemented now.

[16] Click  Apply.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 49

Page 1042: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1042/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 50

Page 1043: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1043/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

With the Presetting mode the Adaptive modulation is disabled.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 51

Page 1044: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1044/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• When the Mode is changed from Presetting to Adaptive Modulation, the radio defaults to 14 MHzbandwidth at 4 QAM.

• If the capacity of the radio (number of E1 lines cross connected) exceeds the available capacity of a 14 MHz Channel at 4 QAM, Adaptive Modulation will not enable.

• It may be necessary to perform one of the following provisioning changes:

• Reduce the quantity of E1 lines being transported to meet the required capacity.

• Increase Reference Channel Spacing.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 52

Page 1045: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1045/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 53

Page 1046: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1046/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 54

Page 1047: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1047/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 55

Page 1048: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1048/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 56

Page 1049: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1049/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• To unprovision an MPT:

• perform a Tx Mute;

• unprovision the MPT;

• remove the power supply.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 57

Page 1050: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1050/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• With the Presetting mode the Adaptive modulation is disabled.

• This field is available only with the MPT-HC V2 with the XPIC+RPS external module installed andif in the Mode area in the Option field a mask with XPIC has been selected.

• The XPIC can be configured in 1+0 or 1+1 HSB (no adaptive modulation, no ATPC).NOT ALL the channel spacings and modulation schemes can support the XPIC Configuration.

• Select the suitable Polarization: Vertical or Horizontal.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 58

Page 1051: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1051/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 59

Page 1052: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1052/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 60

Page 1053: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1053/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 61

Page 1054: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1054/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 62

Page 1055: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1055/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• The configuration of the ASAP unit is divided in four tab-panels:

• E1 Layer

• IMA Layer

• ATM Layer

• ATM PW Layer

• For the configuration of the tab-panels refer to S3-M2.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 63

Page 1056: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1056/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

Configuration the Ethernet ports as explained in S3-M2.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 64

Page 1057: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1057/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 65

Page 1058: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1058/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• The configuration of the AUX unit is divided in two tab-panels:

• Settings

• External Points

• For the configuration of the tab-panels refer to S3-M1.

• For the ATM traffic the Traffic Descriptors must be also configured. Refer to Menu Configuration -> Traffic Descriptors in S3-M1.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 66

Page 1059: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1059/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 67

Page 1060: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1060/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 68

Page 1061: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1061/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• Put a check mark in the NTP protocol field to enable the protocol and write in the Main Serveraddress field the IP address of the server, which is in charge to distribute the time to all the NEsin the network. In the Spare Server address field write the IP address of the Spare Server, if any.

• The Server reachability field is a read-only field, which shows the reachability of the NTPservers. The following information can appear:

• "Main server reachable"

• "Spare server reachable"

• "None servers reachable"

• "Both servers reachable"

• Click  Apply to send to the NE the NTP Configuration.

• Refresh push-button can be used to update the screen.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 69

Page 1062: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1062/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

The user can synchronize the NE time from either the PC/laptop or Network Time Protocol (NTP)servers. Time and date provisioning is accomplished using the NE Time Configuration screens.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 70

Page 1063: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1063/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 71

Page 1064: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1064/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 72

Page 1065: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1065/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

•  Valid Cross Connections:

• Local User Service Cross-Connection

• Pass-through User Service Cross-Connection

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 73

Page 1066: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1066/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 74

Page 1067: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1067/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 75

Page 1068: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1068/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 76

Page 1069: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1069/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 77

Page 1070: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1070/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

Follow the steps to provision tributary port impedance, quality of service classification, and enter NEMAC address.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 78

Page 1071: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1071/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

1) Tributary Port Configuration• This field allows to set the suitable impedance of the E1 stream (Unbalanced 75

ohms/Balanced 120 ohm). To activate the new impedance, click  Apply.

2) DHCP• The DHCP server configures automatically IP address, IP mask and default gateway of the PC

Ethernet interface used to reach the NE. The PC must be configured to get automatically an IPaddress.

• The DHCP server uses an address pool of 10 IP addresses, defined according to the NE TMNport IP address.

• The IP mask is set to the mask of the NE TMN port and the default gateway is set to the NE IPaddress.The lease time is fixed to 10 minutes.To activate the DHCP server, select Enabled and

click  Apply.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 79

Page 1072: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1072/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

3) Admission Control for Adaptive Modulation (ODU300 only)• The Admission Control for TDM flows (cross-connected to radio direction working in Adaptive

Modulation) can be enabled or disabled. Default: “Enabled”. 

• When the Admission Control is "Enabled", the check is performed taking into account thecapacity of the 4 QAM modulation scheme for the relevant Channel Spacing.

• Taking as example 28 MHz channel spacing (with around 130 Mbit/s of net throughputavailable with 64QAM), the maximum number of E1s that could be provisioned is 18; theremaining capacity is devoted to other types of traffic such as ATM or Ethernet.

• When RSL value decreases, modulation schemes are downgraded first from 64QAM to 16QAM:the traffic with lower priority exceeding 16QAM bandwidth is dropped and of course the E1sare kept. As soon as the RSL value further decreases, modulation scheme are downgraded to

4QAM and all the traffic exceeding 4QAM bandwidth is dropped (while the E1s are kept).• When the Admission Control is "Disabled", the check is performed taking into account the

capacity of the highest modulation scheme for the relevant Channel Spacing (64 QAM for 4-16-64 QAM range or 16 QAM for 4-16 QAM range).

• It is possible to provision a number of E1s exceeding the 4QAM throughput; always keeping 28MHz channel as example, it is possible to provision more than 18E1s, up to 37E1s (value linkedwith 16QAM capacity). In this case, when RSL value degrades and modulation scheme isdowngraded from 16QAM to 4QAM, all the TDM traffic is impacted. This feature is answeringthe need of transmitting an high number of E1s, but without giving up the benefits of adaptivemodulation for Ethernet traffic.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 80

Page 1073: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1073/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

4) Ethernet LOS Criteria

• By enabling this feature the following additional criteria are added to the Core protectionswitching criteria:

• LOS of Optical User Ethernet interface

• Card Fail of SFP optical module

• Card Missing of SFP optical module

• LOS of any Electrical User Ethernet interfaces, including the LOS of the forth User Ethernetinterface working as TMN Local Ethernet interface.

• Note: the default switching criteria are:

Core Card Missing• Core Card Fail

• Control Platform operational status failure

• Flash Card realignment in progress

• Flash Card failure

5) Static Lag Criteria

• This feature is available only if the spare Core unit has been installed.

• By enabling this feature the Ethernet ports of the Core-E unit in stand-by are in ON state (asthe ports of the Active Core-E unit), but the Ethernet traffic is not forwarded.

• This behavior allows to reduce the out of service time of user traffic passing through the UserEthernet interfaces in case of Core protection switching.

• This feature shall not be used, when the NE is connected to an equipment performing Link  Aggregation and not supporting Active/Standby management of aggregated links.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 81

Page 1074: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1074/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

6) System Priority Parameter • This parameter is required to provision the System Priority (2 bytes) associated to the NE.• This parameter, together with the System ID (the NE MAC address), determines the System Aggregation Priority (8 bytes). The range for the System Priority parameter is: 0 to 65,535(default: 32,768).

• System Aggregation Priority:• [0 - 1 bytes] System Priority• [2 - 7 bytes] NE MAC address

• The System Aggregation Priority of each System is an eight octet binary number. The Systemwith the numerically lower value of System Aggregation Priority has the higher priority.

• The Ports are selected for aggregation by each System based upon the port priority assignedby the System with the higher System Aggregation Priority, starting with the highest priority

port of the System with the higher priority, and working downward through the ordered list of Port Aggregation Priority values for the N ports, applying the particular constraints imposed onthe System concerned.

7) Event and Alarm Log

• As default the Logging is enabled. If set to "Disabled" the events are not sent to the Event LogBrowser application.

8) NE MAC Address

• This field is a read-only field, which shows the MAC address of the NE. This MAC address must

be used in the cross-connection with TDM2Eth profile.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 82

Page 1075: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1075/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

 After IP address change, the NE restarts.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 83

Page 1076: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1076/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

Follow the steps to provision TMN Ethernet on the Core-E Card to carry SNMP data.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 84

Page 1077: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1077/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

Follow the steps to provision TMN Ethernet on the Core-E Card to carry SNMP data.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 85

Page 1078: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1078/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 86

Page 1079: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1079/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Note:

Follow the steps to provision.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 87

Page 1080: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1080/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 88

Page 1081: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1081/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

Follow the steps to provision Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol static (automatic) routing.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 89

Page 1082: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1082/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

This page is left blank intentionally

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 90

Page 1083: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1083/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 91

Page 1084: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1084/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 92

Page 1085: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1085/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 93

Page 1086: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1086/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 94

Page 1087: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1087/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

•The Provisioning Tool can be used "offline" and "online".

• In case of offline, it allows to prepare the provisioning in back office. Minimizing time on fieldand mistakes.

• With the online mode you can either apply the "offline" configuration or fulfill online.

• This tool is recommended for first installation.

• Thanks to a step by step approach this tool is easy to handle and allows to minimize time forprovisioning

• WebEML is more flexible and mandatory to configure AUX and ATM boards (not yet supported inprovisioning tool).

• Select:

• the direct connection to the NE by putting a check mark on “Connect to NE”. When youlocally connect the PC to the NE, in the IP Address field automatically (through theautodiscovery) appears the IP Address of the NE (in the NE the default configuration of theDHCP server is enabled; for this reason your PC must be configured to obtain an IP Addressautomatically).

• Click on OK .

• If the DHCP server is disabled, the IP address to be entered is the IP address of the NMSEthernet port.

• or 

• the off-line configuration by putting a check mark on “Do not connect to NE” and by clicking

on Apply.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 95

Page 1088: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1088/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• The buttons present in this screen has the following meaning:

• Open: allows opening an existing MCML (XML-based) configuration file. MCML file can containsNE configuration data and it can be used to fill panels fields and data.

• Get: not operative.

• Create: allows to create a new configuration file.

• Prev: not operative.

• Cancel: not operative.

• Help: by clicking on this button the operator calls the help on line.

• By clicking on the "Open" button a window opens, which gives the possibility to open aconfiguration file created in an older version. If an older configuration file is open a new screenappears, which asks to convert the file.

• By clicking on the "Create" button it will be possible to create a file in the current version or inthe older version.

•  After opening a configuration file, the user will see a configuration preview in order tounderstand, for example, if the file is correct and contains the wanted configuration. Click "Next"button from such preview panel or "Create" button.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 96

Page 1089: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1089/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• The buttons present in this screen has the following meaning:

• Open: allows opening an existing MCML (XML-based) configuration file. MCML file can containsNE configuration data and it can be used to fill panels fields and data.

• Get: this button is operative if you are physically connected to the NE and it is used to uploadthe configuration from the NE to the tool.

• Create: allows to create a new configuration file.

• Prev: not operative.

• Cancel: not operative.

• Help: by clicking on this button the operator calls the help on line.

• By clicking on the "Open" button a window opens, which gives the possibility to open aconfiguration file created in an older version. If an older configuration file is open a new screenappears, which asks to convert the file.

• By clicking on the "Create" button it will be possible to create a file in the current version or inthe older version.

•  After opening a configuration file, the user will see a configuration preview in order tounderstand, for example, if the file is correct and contains the wanted configuration. Click "Next"button from such preview panel or "Create" button.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 97

Page 1090: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1090/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Note:

• Press the Clear Database and Restart NE button and then press Create to create a newconfiguration or press Open to open a previously created configuration.

• If you don't press the Clear Database and Restart NE button at the end of the configurationyou can save the file, but you cannot apply the configuration to the NE. (The Apply button willnot be available at the end of the procedure).

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 98

Page 1091: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1091/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• This screen is a generic one that depicts all of the pull-down options possible depending on whichcard is selected in the card slot. Protections options shown are for all cards.

• Warning: the Provisioning Tool allows to configue all the units, except the EAS unit, ASAP unitand AUX unit. (The EAS unit, ASAP unit and the AUX unit must be configured with the LCT).

• Warning: To configure the equipment extract the ASAP and/or AUX units, if any.

• The SDH unit is available in 2 versions:

• SDHACC (operation in transparent mode)

• SDHCHAN (operation in channelized mode)

Warning: If from this NE remote NEs have to be reached, remember to configure properly theRouting Protocol of the TMN-RF channel, if the remote NE is connected through the radio link orof the NMS Ethernet Port, if the remote NE is connected through the Ethernet cable.

• Buttons:

• Restore: allows to restore in the screen the initial data without any change

• Prev: the procedure goes back to the previous step (the changed data may be lost after theWarning message)

• Next: the procedure goes on to the next step (some checks and data storage is done)

• Cancel: the procedure goes back to step 1 (Opening screen)

• Help: by clicking on this button the operator calls the help on line.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 99

Page 1092: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1092/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

•  A white icon indicates that there are no cross-connections, but cross-connections can becreated.

•  A blue icon indicates the destination is full. The limits granted by the license key have beenexceeded. A message is also displayed stating that no more E1 ports will be accepted.

•  A green icon indicates that the source and destination are available and the destination canaccept more E1 ports.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 100

Page 1093: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1093/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 101

Page 1094: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1094/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 102

Page 1095: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1095/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• With the TDM2TDM service profile the TDM Clock source is fixed to Differential (RTP - Real TimeProtocol is used); with the TDM2Eth service profile the TDM Clock source can be Differential (RTP- Real Time Protocol is used) or Adaptive (RTP is not used).

• In the unit it is not possible to have mixed configurations with service profiles using RTPand other service profiles not using RTP.

• Example: if in the unit only one E1 has service profile TDM2TDM it is possible to configure otherE1 with service profile TDM2Eth only with the Differential clock source (not with the Adaptiveclock source).

• If the Adaptive clock source is requested the E1 must be connected to another PDH unit.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 103

Page 1096: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1096/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 104

Page 1097: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1097/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 105

Page 1098: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1098/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 106

Page 1099: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1099/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 107

Page 1100: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1100/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• With the Adaptive Modulation the only available configuration is: 1+0 or 1+1 HSB.

• The operator can modify only the 4 QAM field. In this field the operator has to enter the constantpower, which will be used with 4 QAM modulation. The power range is shown on the right sideand depends on the selected reference mode.

• The same power value will be used by the 16 QAM and 64 QAM modulation schemes.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 108

Page 1101: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1101/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 109

Page 1102: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1102/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

The selection of the Power Supply mode to supply the MPT can be: PFoE (through 1 cable for MPT-MC or MPT-HC with the DC Extractor) or QMA (through 2 cables for MPT-HC).

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 110

Page 1103: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1103/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• This field is available only with the MPT-HC V2 with the XPIC+RPS external module installed andif in the Mode area in the Option field a mask  with XPIC has been selected.

• The XPIC can be configured in 1+0 or 1+1 HSB (no adaptive modulation, no ATPC).

• NOT ALL the channel spacings and modulation schemes can support the XPIC Configuration.

• To configure the XPIC go to “MPT-HC V2 with XPIC” slide. 

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 111

Page 1104: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1104/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 112

Page 1105: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1105/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 113

Page 1106: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1106/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 114

Page 1107: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1107/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 115

Page 1108: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1108/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 116

Page 1109: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1109/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

• This field is available only with the MPT-HC V2 with the XPIC+RPS external module installed andif in the Mode area in the Option field a mask  with XPIC has been selected.

• The XPIC can be configured in 1+0 or 1+1 HSB (no adaptive modulation, no ATPC).

• NOT ALL the channel spacings and modulation schemes can support the XPIC Configuration.

• To configure the XPIC go to “MPT-HC V2 with XPIC” slide. 

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 117

Page 1110: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1110/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 118

Page 1111: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1111/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 119

Page 1112: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1112/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 120

Page 1113: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1113/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 121

Page 1114: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1114/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 122

Page 1115: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1115/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 123

Page 1116: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1116/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 124

Page 1117: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1117/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

To configure the XPIC refer to S3-M2.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 125

Page 1118: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1118/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

To configure the XPIC refer to S3-M2.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 126

Page 1119: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1119/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

To create the Cross-Connection refer to S3_M3.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 127

Page 1120: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1120/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

To segregate the ports refer to S3_M3

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 128

Page 1121: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1121/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 129

Page 1122: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1122/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 130

Page 1123: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1123/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 131

Page 1124: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1124/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

1.  VLAN ID field: Enter the VLAN ID (the configurable values must be in the range 2 - 4080)

• The VLAN IDs already defined to cross-connect internal flows (i.e. TDM2TDM, TDM2ETH)can-not be used.

2.  VLAN Name field: Enter the VLAN Name: a text string of up to 32 characters.

• There is no check on unambiguity name.

3.  VLAN Ports field: Select the ports members of this VLAN by putting a check mark on therelevant check box. All the user Ethernet ports and all the Radio directions can be considered.Both enabled and disabled user Ethernet ports (radio ports when declared are implicitlyenabled) can be member of a VLAN. This means that a disabled port can be configured as amember of a VLAN and a port already member of a VLAN can be disabled continuing to be a

member of the same VLAN.4. Untagged Ports field: Select, among the ports belonging to this VLAN (members), the

untagged ports (in egress the VLAN will be removed from the frames). Only the user Ethernetports, enabled and disabled, are manageable. The VLAN cannot be removed from the radioports (with the exception of the VLAN 1).

• The VLAN-ID values allowed are in the range 2 - 4080. By default, for the VLAN IDs defined, allthe ports are members and the Untag flag is set to “False”, which means all the frames are trans-mitted with Tag.

• Tagged frames - If one tagged packet with VLAN-ID X is received on a port which is not memberof the VLAN-ID X, the packet is dropped.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 132

Page 1125: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1125/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

The Port VLAN Configuration screen opens only if in the Bridge Configuration screen the 802.1Q(Virtual Bridge) has been selected.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 133

Page 1126: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1126/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 134

Page 1127: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1127/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 135

Page 1128: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1128/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

 A Trusted manager is an SNMP manager to which the NE automatically sends the TRAPS generatedinside the NE.

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 136

Page 1129: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1129/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

Buttons:

• Prev: the procedure goes back to the previous step

• Save: allows to save the configuration file

• Apply: it is operative only if you are physically connected to the NE and it activates thedownload of the configuration to the NE

• Cancel: the procedure goes back to step 1 (Opening screen)

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 137

Page 1130: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1130/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 138

Page 1131: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1131/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

This page is left blank intentionally

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 139

Page 1132: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1132/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix A · Module 1 · Page 140

Page 1133: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1133/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix B · Module 1 · Page 1

Page 1134: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1134/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix B · Module 1 · Page 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.4 2012-07-01 AL University First edition

4.0 2012-09-14 AL University Updated for Release 4.0

Page 1135: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1135/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix B · Module 1 · Page 3

Page 1136: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1136/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix B · Module 1 · Page 4

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 1137: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1137/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix B · Module 1 · Page 5

Page

1 MPR Management 71.1 9500 MPR Management 81.2 MPR IP addresses 91.3 TMN communication channels 111.4 TMN interfaces (9500 MPR Node) 121.5 LCT Connection 131.6 MPR Capability  – IP Parameters 14

Page 1138: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1138/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix B · Module 1 · Page 6

This page is left blank intentionally

Page 1139: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1139/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix B · Module 1 · Page 7

Page 1140: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1140/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix B · Module 1 · Page 8

Page 1141: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1141/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes:

Refer to the attached diagram as an example of the IP address assignment.

 Appendix B · Module 1 · Page 9

Page 1142: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1142/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix B · Module 1 · Page 10

Page 1143: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1143/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

Notes: 

• With the introduction of TMN In-Band two new IP interfaces are added to those already available.

• NE Local IP Address

• TMN Local Ethernet interface, IP/subnet

• TMN Out-of-Band interface on User Ethernet port 4, IP/subnet

• TMN In-Band interface #1, IP/subnet

• TMN In-Band interface #2, IP/subnet

• User Ethernet port 4 can then used as:

• pure Ethernet traffic interface

• pure Out-of-band TMN Local Ethernet interface

• Ethernet traffic interface carrying TMN In-Band traffic

• The NE Local IP Address can be reused on one of the other TMN interfaces. These interfacesmust have different IP subnets.

 Appendix B · Module 1 · Page 11

Page 1144: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1144/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix B · Module 1 · Page 12

Page 1145: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1145/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix B · Module 1 · Page 13

Page 1146: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1146/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix B · Module 1 · Page 14

Page 1147: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1147/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix B · Module 1 · Page 15

Page 1148: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1148/1149

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.Edition 2.0

 Appendix B · Module 1 · Page 16

Page 1149: TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

7/22/2019 TWT42025-R4.0-SG1-SEN-I2.0

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/twt42025-r40-sg1-sen-i20 1149/1149

1 Management System

Example of MPR IP addresses

 

Node A

Node B

NE IP 10.0.3.1

NMS IP 10.0.10.1

NE MAC 00:20:60:05:02:07

NMS P4 OFF

OSPF AREA 0.0.0.1

1+1 HSB

Traffic E1+ETH

TMN

Traffic E1 TDM2ETH 

Traffic ETHPort Number 

VLAN ID

Traffic E1 TDM2TDM 

VLAN ID

11 12 13 14  27 28  41 42

1 2 3 4 17 18 3132

1 2

VLAN ID

27 28

1,2,… 

1,2,…

ETH 1

ETH 2

NE IP 10.0.3.2

NMS IP 10.0.30.2

NE MAC 00:20:60:05:02:08

NMS P4 OFF

OSPF AREA 0.0.0.1

NE IP 10.0.3.3

PC IP 10.0.10.100

DEFAULT GATEWAY 10.0.10.1TDM A

TDM C

TDM B

TDM C

Example of MPR IP addresses